Skip to main content

Full text of "A manual of cursive shorthand"

See other formats


0  I 

iio! 

ill 

9: 
9 

6 
3 


A    MANUAL 


OF 


BY 


HUGH   L.  CALLENDAR,  BA. 

FELLOW    OF    TRINITY    COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE. 


Hon&on:  c.  J.  CLAY 

CAMBRIDGE   UNIVERSITY   PRESS   WAREHOUSE, 
AVE     MARIA    LANK. 

1889 
Price  Two  Shillings. 


Ex  Libris 
C.  K.  OGDEN 


A    MANUAL 


OF 


CUESIVE   SHOBTHAND 


BY 

HUGH   L.  CALLENDAR,  B.A. 

FELLOW    OF   TRINITY  COLLEGE,    CAMBRIDGE. 


Honlron:  c.  J.  CLAY  AND  SONS, 

CAMBRIDGE   UNIVEESITY  PEESS  WAREHOUSE, 
AYE     MAEIA    LANE. 

1889 
All  Rights  reserved. 


PRINTED  BY  C.  J.   CLAY.   M.A.   AND  SONS, 
AT  THE   BKIVKHSITY   PKESS. 


PREFACE. 

HITHERTO  the  use  of  Shorthand  has  been  chiefly  con- 
fined to  clerks  and  reporters :  it  has  not  as  yet,  to  any 
appreciable  extent,  supplanted  longhand  for  use  in 
ordinary  writing. 

The  reason  of  this  appears  to  be  that  the  majority  of 
existing  systems  are  either,  like  Taylor's,  deficient  in 
completeness  (that  is,  they  cannot  distinguish  words  with 
sufficient  accuracy),  or,  like  Pitman's,  involve  too  many 
ambiguities  and  refinements,  and  cannot  be  fully  written 
at  a  reasonable  speed  (see  p.  15). 

The  conditions  which  a  system  of  shorthand  for  general 
use  should  satisfy,  are  discussed  at  some  length  in  the 
Introduction  to  the  present  work.  The  argument  is  briefly 
recapitulated  on  p.  40,  to  which  the  reader  is  referred  for 
a  summary  of  the  claims  of  '  Cursive  Shorthand'. 

The  chief  features  of  'Cursive'  are  facility,  complete- 
ness, and  freedom  from  refinements;  but  it  must  not 
be  supposed  that  it  is  therefore  wanting  in  brevity.  The 
ordinary  style  of  Cursive,  besides  being  much  clearer, 
is  also  much  shorter  than  the  corresponding  style*  of 

*  It  would  not  of  course  be  fair  to  compare  the  ordinary  full  style  of 
Cursive  with  the  reporting  style  of  Pitman's.  I  mention  the  point 
because  I  have  noticed  that  Mr  Pitman,  in  a  widely  circulated  pamphlet 
on  Professor  Everett's  system,  compares  a  short  paragraph  written 
in  the  latter's  ordinary  style,  with  the  same  in  the  most  abbreviated 
style  of  Phonography.  The  two  specimens  are  set  side  by  side  "to  speak 
for  themselves  ",  without  the  least  hint  that  the  comparison  is  not  a  fair 
one.  In  the  Everett  specimen  more  than  80  vowels  are  definitely  ex- 
pressed ;  only  three  are  inserted  in  the  Pitman. 

1—2 


iv  Preface. 

Pitman's.  In  the  reporting  style,  if  equally  abbreviated, 
Cursive  has  still  the  advantage  in  facility  and  clearness. 
This  point  is  more  fully  illustrated  in  the  'Comparison 
with  Pitman'  p.  102,  and  in  the  Introduction. 

In  comparing  the  two  systems  it  must  be  remembered 
that  the  primary  object  of  Cursive  is  general  utility,  and 
that  the  present  manual  is  not  intended  to  teach  the 
reporting  style.  Moreover,  Cursive,  as  its  name  implies, 
was  invented  with  a  view  to  being  written  with  a  '•running'1 
hand,  and  does  not  show  to  advantage  in  a  type-metal  cut ; 
whereas  Pitman's,  being  a  'geometric'  system,  is  specially 
adapted  to  that  mode  of  illustration,  but  very  difficult 
to  write  accurately. 

The  difficulty  of  satisfactorily  imitating  the  natural 
peculiarities  of  a  '  script '  system  in  a  type-block  is  so 
great  that  works  of  this  kind  are  almost  invariably  illus- 
trated by  photolithography.  I  have  all  the  more  therefore 
to  thank  the  type-cutter,  Mr  Saunders,  whose  work  in 
connection  with  the  illustration  of  shorthand  systems  is  so 
well  known,  for  the  great  care  and  skill  he  has  bestowed 
on  the  laborious  task  of  executing  the  cuts  for  the  present 
work. 

I  wish  also  to  thank  my  friends,  Mr  H.  M.  Innes,  M.A., 
Fellow  of  Trinity  College,  Mr  C.  F.  Clay,  M.A.  of  Trinity 
College,  and  Mr  J.  B.  Holt,  B.A.  of  Christ's,  for  their 
kindness  in  reading  proof-sheets,  and  for  many  valuable 
suggestions  they  have  made  while  the  book  was  passing 
through  the  press:  having  had  the  advantage  of  their 
revision  the  work  should  be  free  from  serious  errors. 

H.  L.  CALLENDAR. 
TRINITY  COLLEGE, 
CAMBRIDGE, 
Dec.  1888. 


INTRODUCTION. 


ON   THE  PEINCIPLES   OF   SHOETHAND. 

1.  CURSIVE  SHORTHAND  is  designed  to  supply  the  need  of  a 
system  sufficiently  easy,  regular,  and  legible,  for  general  use, 
and  at  the  same  time  brief  enough  to  be  adapted  to  reporting 
purposes. 

The  advantages  to  be  derived  from  a  knowledge  of  short- 
hand are  sufficiently  obvious,  and  are  moreover  very  fully  set 
forth  by  many  other  writers  on  the  subject.  The  principles 
upon  which  a  good  system  should  be  constructed  are  much  less 
generally  understood.  I  may  be  pardoned  therefore  if  in 
publishing  a  new  system  I  proceed  at  once  to  the  considera- 
tion of  the  principles  it  involves,  taking  it  for  granted  that  the 
reader  fully  appreciates  the  benefits  resulting  from  a  practical 
acquaintance  with  the  art,  and  seriously  desires  to  master  it. 

The  aim  of  every  shorthand  inventor  has  always  been 
to  produce  a  system  of  writing  which  should  be  as  brief  as 
is  compatible  with  the  conditions  that  it  should  also  be  simple 
to  learn,  easy  to  write,  and  easy  to  read.  The  widest  divergence 
of  opinion  exists,  however,  in  the  interpretation  of  these  re- 
quirements. The  relative  importance  to  be  attached  to  the 
qualities  of  Brevity,  Simplicity,  Facility,  and  Legibility,  de- 
pends in  part  on  the  purpose  to  which  shorthand  is  applied. 
For  reporting  purposes  brevity  is  a  most  essential  condition ; 
but  for  general  use  legibility  is  much  more  indispensable,  and 
a  very  high  rate  of  speed  is  comparatively  valueless.  The 
reason  why  shorthand  is  not  more  generally  practised,  appears 
to  me  to  be  that  this  point  is  not  sufficiently  kept  in  view. 

A  system  adapted  for  reporting  may  be  more  or  less  un- 


2  On  tlie  Principles  of  Shorthand. 

suitable  for  general  use.  For  instance,  the  system  known  as 
Legible  Shorthand,  by  Mr  E.  Pocknell,  was  specially  con- 
structed to  secure  the  greatest  possible  brevity,  and  is  con- 
sequently, as  the  author  himself  admits,  unnecessarily  difficult 
and  delicate  for  general  use.  The  same  remark  applies  to 
Pitman's  system,  which,  moreover,  is  much  less  regular  than 
PocknelPs.  Mr  Pitman,  however,  claims  that  his  system  of 
phonography  is,  at  once,  "as  legible  as  longhand  and  six  times 
as  brief"*;  and  "so  simple  that  a  child  can  master  it"t. 

In  explaining  the  conditions  which  a  system  for  general  use 
must  satisfy,  I  have  drawn  my  illustrations  mainly  from 
Pitman's  Phonography,  both  because  it  claims  to  be  the  uni- 
versal system  J,  and  because  from  practical  experience  I  am 
well  acquainted  myself  with  its  merits  and  drawbacks. 

For  convenience  of  arrangement,  the  subject  is  divided  into 
four  general  headings,  (1)  Conditions  of  Facility,  (2)  of 
Simplicity,  (3)  of  Legibility,  (4)  of  Brevity.  It  must  however 
be  understood  that  these  conditions  are  not  generally  indepen- 
dent of  each  other :  the  conditions  of  brevity  are  often  opposed 
to  those  of  legibility,  which  again  are  dependent  on  those  of 
facility  and  simplicity ;  other  things  being  equal,  the  more 
simple  and  facile  a  system  is,  the  greater  the  speed  with  which 
it  can  be  legibly  written.  The  suitability  of  a  system  for 
general  use,  depends,  not  on  excessive  attention  to  any  one 
point,  such  as  neatness  or  brevity  of  appearance,  but  on  the 
blending  of  all  the  various  qualifications  in  due  proportion. 

For  a  brief  summary  of  the  claims  of  Cursive  Shorthand  as 
a  system  for  general  use  the  reader  is  referred  to  p.  40. 

CONDITIONS   OF  FACILITY  AND   CLEARNESS. 

2.  DISTINCTIONS  OF  FORM.  In  order  that  any  kind  of 
writing  may  be  scribbled  without  becoming  illegible,  too  fine 
distinctions  of  form  must  be  avoided. 

*  Tract  entitled,  "A  Persuasive  to  the  Study  of  Phonography." 

t  Pitman,  Leaflet  No.  13. 

t  During  the  last  year  or  two  several  articles  have  appeared  in 
Pitman's  Journal,  asserting  that  it  is  the  only  system  fitted  for  general 
use,  and  advocating  its  adoption  to  the  exclusion  of  all  others. 


Cutiditions  of  Facility  aiid  Clearness.  3 

In  my  experience,  which  I  find  is  endorsed  by  many  skilful 
stenographers,  and  in  particular  by  Professor  Everett,  it  is 
impossible  in  rapid  writing  to  distinguish  more  than  two  sizes 
of  character,  as  in  longhand. 

Pitman  distinguishes  four :  for  instance 
•  "    stands  for  you  or  beyond  according  to  position. 
^    mt  as  in  might,  met,  meeting,  etc. 
^—^  m  as  in  me, my,  him,  may,  am,  etc. 
^ — ^  mtr,  mdr,  or  mthr  as  in  matter,  mother,  etc. 

Difference  of  curvature,  by  itself,  apart  from  difference  of 
size  or  direction,  is  not  a  safe  means  of  distinction.  For 
instance,  the  Pitman  outline  ^~\  Ir  (liar,  lore,  allure,  lower, 
etc.)  differs  but  slightly  in  shape  from  m  or  mtr,  and  is  easily 
mistaken  for  either  if  badly  written. 

Difference  of  direction  is  a  good  means  of  distinction,  pro- 
vided that  too  many  directions  are  not  recognized.  In  Cursive 
Shorthand  four  directions  are  practically  distinguished ;  the 
downstrokes  /  and  \ ,  the  upstroke  / ,  and  the  horizontal 
stroke  — .  Pitman  distinguishes  the  vertical  stroke  |  from  the 
back  downstroke  / ;  each  of  these  strokes  however  is  some- 
times awkward ;  by  adopting,  instead  of  them,  the  intermediate 
slope  /  (which  may  of  course  have  any  convenient  inclination 
between  the  two  extremes),  an  immense  gain  of  clearness  and 
facility  is  secured. 

The  forward  downstroke  \  is  certainly  less  facile  than  the 
other  directions ;  but  it  is  waste  of  material  to  reject  it  al- 
together, as  so  many  script  systems  do :  a  better  plan  is  to  use 
it  for  comparatively  rare  sounds. 

3.  DISTINCTION  OF  THICKNESS.  In  Pitman's  and  similar 
systems,  difference  of  thickness  of  stroke  is  employed  to  dis- 
tinguish pairs  of  letters  like  |  t  and  |  d,  ~~\  r  and  "^  rch, 
s~~~.  m  and  /—s  mp  or  mb :  it  is  very  difficult  in  rapid  writing  to 
preserve  this  distinction  accurately,  even  after  years  of  practice. 

It  is  true  that  the  difference  of  sound  in  many  of  these 


4  Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

pairs  (as  between  (  and  d)  is  not  very  great ;  but  the  confusion, 
even  in  this  case,  becomes  very  serious,  when  more  than  half 
the  sounds  are  omitted,  so  that  the  writing  is  not  strictly 
phonetic.  In  Professor  Everett's  system,  which  is  very  strictly 
phonetic  and  literally  represents  '  talking  on  paper ',  con- 
fusion of  thickness  is  not  nearly  so  serious  as  in  Pitman's, 
in  which  the  vowels  are  generally  omitted,  and  the  phonetic 
principle  is  otherwise  less  accurately  observed. 

In  writing  with  a  pencil  the  distinction  of  thickness  is 
particularly  difficult  to  give  clearly ;  with  a  stylograph  it  is 
quite  impossible  to  make  it  at  all.  Some  writers  no  doubt 
possess  the  light  touch  required  to  enable  them  to  preserve 
it  in  a  large  number  of  cases  when  using  pen  and  ink,  but 
the  majority  of  ordinary  folk  would  probably  never  acquire 
the  requisite  skill.  It  must  therefore,  I  think,  be  regarded  as 
a  device  unsuitable  for  general  use. 

Cursive  Shorthand  uses  only  two  sizes  of  characters,  and 
does  not  employ  the  distinction  of  thickness.  Thus,  where 
Pitman  distinguishes  the  ten*  varieties,  \  of,  \  all,  \  pt, 

\    bd,     ^  p,     "^  b,      \w      pp,         >^       bb,      ^^    bp, 
N.       pb :  Cursive  Shorthand  distinguishes  only  two,   \  £,  as 

in  ell,  and  \.  ey,  as  in  they:  and  so  on  throughout  the 
alphabet.  It  is  therefore,  on  this  account  alone,  much  more 
easy  to  write  legibly,  and  much  more  simple  to  learn. 

It  might  appear  at  first  sight  as  though  by  recognizing  five 
times  as  many  distinctions  it  would  be  possible  to  make  a 
system,  say,  twice  as  short.  This  is  by  no  means  the  case,  even 
in  theory;  and  as  a  matter  of  fact,  Pitman's  Phonography,  as 
will  appear  later,  is  not  only  not  shorter,  but  actually  takes 
very  much  longer  to  write  than  Cursive  Shorthand,  when 
fully  written. 

*  Pitman  admits  also  an  occasional  treble  length  in  words  like 
attitude  (p.  35).  The  additional  distinction  of  position  (see  p.  31)  is 
applied  to  many  of  these  signs.  Pocknell  distinguishes  only  eight 
varieties,  and  does  not  use  ticks  standing  alone. 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 


CHEONOGRAPHIC  EXPEEIMENTS. 

4.  With  a  view  to  ascertain  for  my  own  edification  what 
sort   of   combinations    were   most   facile,   and    what    forme 
could  be  most   clearly  distinguished  in  rapid  writing,  I  put 
together  an  electric  chronograph  capable  of  recording  auto- 
matically to  the  hundredth  part  of  a  second  the  time  taken  to 
form  any  portion  of  any  stroke  in  any  kind  of  writing.     At  the 
Cambridge  laboratories  we  have  every  facility  for  this  kind 
of  work.     The  clockwork,  electro-magnets,  and  other  parts  of 
such  an  apparatus  being  ready  to  hand,  very  little  has  to  be 
specially  constructed.     The  special  portions  of  the  apparatus  in 
the  present  case  were  made  after  a  design  suggested  by  my 
friend  Mr  Horace  Darwin ;  its  performance  was  all  that  could 
be  desired. 

The  apparatus  was  so  arranged  that  by  comparing  the 
actual  writing  with  the  record  on  the  chronographic  cylinder, 
a  complete  solution  of  the  time-question  could  be  obtained. 
A  great  many  experiments  were  made  on  various  kinds  of 
writing,  including  specimens  of  Phonography  (Pitman's)  by  a 
skilled  reporter.  Space  would  not  suffice  to  give  a  full  descrip- 
tion of  the  experiments;  only  a  few  of  the  more  interesting 
results  will  be  incidentally  mentioned  as  the  questions  arise  to 
which  they  refer:  but  to  myself  the  experience  thus  acquired 
was  of  the  greatest  practical  value  in  the  endeavour  to  esta- 
blish the  present  system  on  a  sound  basis. 

5.  LENGTH  OF  OUTLINES.     Among  the  general  results  of 
these  experiments  we  may  here  mention  that,  as   is  evident 
a  priori,  the  actual  length  of  an  outline  has  little  relation  to 
its  facility.     One  often  sees  estimates  of  the  relative  facility  of 
two  systems  based  almost  entirely  on  a  comparison  of  the  dis- 
tances traversed  by  the  pen,   whereas  the  order  in  which  a 
series  of  strokes  is  made,  and,  above  all,  the  way  in  which  they 
are  joined,  are  a  great  deal  more  important  than  the  length  or 
direction  of  the  individual  strokes. 

In    deciding   questions    of   relative    facility  and  in   esti- 


6  Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

mating  speed,  the  method  of  repetition  has,  I  believe,  been 
exclusively  adopted  by  previous  experimentalists.  It  has  the 
merit  of  simplicity,  but  the  information  it  affords  is  not 
complete  and  may  even  be  misleading.  For  instance,  in 
describing  a  series  of  strokes,  such  as  \,  in  succession,  the 
hand  and  arm  are  unconsciously  placed  in  the  most  favourable 
position  for  that  particular  direction,  so  that,  in  an  experiment 
thus  conducted,  it  may  happen  to  appear  more  facile  than  it 
really  is.  The  chronographic  method  has  the  advantage  that 
the  actual  conditions  of  the  problem  are  more  closely  repro- 
duced ;  it  is  possible  to  determine  the  exact  time  corresponding 
to  each  portion  of  an  outline,  and  to  allow  for  imperfections  of 
formation,  and  for  loss  of  time  from  hesitation  or  other  causes. 

A  common  method  of  estimating  the  time  required  to  write 
any  given  passage,  is  to  count  the  number  of  '  pen-strokes'  or 
'  inflections'.  Not  to  mention  the  difficulty  of  fixing  definitely 
the  meaning  of  an  'inflection',  this  is  a  very  rough  and  in- 
accurate method,  especially  if  lifts  of  the  pen  are  not  taken 
into  account*.  For  instance,  on  this  plan,  the  combination 
~\  ^/  might  be  counted  as  two  pen-strokes,  and  the  combina- 
tion n  as  three,  whereas  in  reality  the  latter  is  much  the  more 
facile. 

In  comparing  different  specimens  of  the  same  system,  or  of 
similar  systems,  Professor  Everett's  rulef  would  give  reliable 
results,  although  it  makes  no  allowance  for  the  great  differences 
that  occur  as  regards  good  and  awkward  joinings.  But  in 
comparing  a  script  with  a  geometric  system,  it  would  be 
absurdly  unfair  to  the  former,  because  no  account  is  taken  of 
its  most  essential  feature,  namely  that  the  majority  of  the 
outlines  and  joinings  are  easy.  No  such  simple  rule  in  fact 
can  be  made  to  meet  this  case. 

The  objection  to  all  such  rules  is  that  they  cannot  take 
account  of  clearness  as  apart  from  ease  of  joining;  the  easiest 

*  See  the  controversy  on  Shorthand  Systems  in  The  Bazaar,  1882-83. 

t  Shorthand.  May,  1884.  'All  round  Criticism.'  (This  is  the  organ 
of  the  Shorthand  Society,  and  must  not  be  confused  with  Ford's 
Shorthand  Magazine.) 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.  7 

joinings  are  often  the  most  indistinct.  The  real  question  is 
not  the  making  of  a  number  of  marks,  but  of  distinctions;  not 
how  briefly  a  word  can  be  written,  but  at  what  speed  it  can  be 
safely  distinguished.  A  system  abounding  in  outlines  that 
cannot  be  clearly  distinguished  unless  carefully  drawn  to  scale, 
and  that  cannot  therefore  be  written  fast  without  spoiling  most 
of  its  characteristic  features,  however  neat  and  brief  it  may 
appear  in  print,  ia  quite  unsuitable  for  general  use,  and  cannot 
be  compared  with  a  system  in  which  such  faults  are  avoided. 

6.  STRAIGHT  LINES  VERSUS  CURVES.   It  is  commonly  stated 
that  straight  lines  are  more  facile  than  curves.    This  is  true  of 
a  series  of  straight  lines  described  independently ;  but  the  curve 
often  has  the  advantage  in  the  matter  of  joining  to  other  cha- 
racters, for  its  curvature  may  generally  be  varied,  especially 
near  the  ends,  so  as  to  make  the  joining  easier.     The  most 
facile  directions  for   straight  strokes   are   the   up  and   down 
strokes  of  longhand    /  /  ,  the  horizontal  stroke  —  ,  and  the 
upstroke  /.     The  backward  slope    \    is  generally  awkward 
unless  the  arm  be  held  in  an  unnatural  position.     The  hori- 
zontal curves  r\  w  are  the  most  facile  curves;  they  do  not 
leave  the  line   of  writing,  and  they  generally  present  good 
joinings, 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  the  arrangement  of  the  alphabet  is 
such  that  curves  are  more  common  than  straight  lines:  the 
majority  of  the  strokes  are  on  the  slope  of  longhand  writing, 
and  lines  in  the  awkward  direction  are  comparatively  rare. 

7.  SCRIPT  SYSTEMS  AND  GEOMETRIC  SYSTEMS.    Since  every 
educated  person  must  learn  to  write  longhand,  and  generally 
acquires  considerable  facility  therein,  he  will  evidently  find  a 
system  of  shorthand  easier  to  write,  the  more  closely  it  imitates 
the  outlines  and  joinings  with  which  he  is  already  familiar  in 
longhand. 

The  objection  to  script  systems  in  general  (such  as  that  of 
Gabelsberger)  is  that  the  distinction  between  different  charac- 
ters is  often  too  vague  and  indefinite ;  they  cannot  usually  be 


8  Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

defined  by  simple  geometrical  forms.  The  outlines  resemble  a 
series  of  flourishes  in  which  the  component  characters  cannot 
easily  be  traced;  and  the  points  of  distinction  are  often  so 
subtle  as  to  be  difficult  to  recognize  even  in  an  engraving. 

On  the  other  hand  a  strictly  geometrical  system  abounds  in 
polygonal  outlines,  like  these  /~\  \x~i  "^  ^/\/  (taken 
from  Taylor,  1786),  which  are  very  far  from  cursive  and  are 
difficult  to  write  freely.  Again  there  are  several  good  outlines, 
such  as  Q/  fl  I  (j  ,  which  are  common  and  familiar  in  long- 
hand, but  of  which  a  geometric  system  cannot  make  any  use 
proportionate  to  their  facility. 

I  have  endeavoured  in  Cursive  Shorthand  to  combine  the 
advantages  of  both  methods.  The  characters  of  the  alphabet 
are  defined  as  far  as  possible  by  simple  geometrical  forms,  but 
are  assigned  to  the  various  sounds  of  the  language  in  such 
a  way  that  the  majority  of  the  outlines  are  cursive,  and  as 
similar  as  possible  to  those  of  longhand.  The  other  class  of 
outlines,  however,  are  not  altogether  rejected,  but  are  relegated 
to  the  representation  of  comparatively  rare  combinations  of 
sounds ;  such  as  x~\  Oh-eh,  in  Oasis. 

8.  BLUNT  ANGLES.  Whenever  a  blunt  angle  occurs  in  an 
outline  there  is  a  tendency  in  rapid  writing  either  to  sharpen 
or  slur  it.  The  great  objection  to  geometric  systems  is  that 
they  abound  in  blunt  angles. 

An  outline  such  as  \ pk  (Pitman),  when  written 

rapidly,  tends  to  become  | or  \  (usually  the  latter),  which 

both  mean  something  totally  different.  A  blunt  angle  is  most 
difficult  to  mark  distinctly  when  it  occurs  before  or  after  a 
curve  in  the  same  direction,  as  in  the  Pitman  outlines, 

r^  help'd,   ^y  flirt,    ex;         wearer,    V^/""^  forum. 

Outlines  of  this  kind,  in  which  the  blunt  angle  cannot 
be  rounded  off  without  causing  confusion,  become  indistinct 
when  written  fast. 

The  chronographic  experiments  showed  that  a  blunt  angle 
was  never  correctly  given,  even  by  accident,  without  consider- 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.  9 

able  waste  of  time,  and  that  to  mark  it  with  the  minimum  of 
distinctness  took  longer  than  to  make  two  sharp  angles.  A 

sharp  angle,  such  as  •> <u,  is  the  most  rapid  and  distinctive 

joining  of  all,  being  slightly  superior  to  a  circle  between  two 
curves  in  the  same  direction,  such  as  VJ^.  Two  characters 

joined  continuously,  like  kk  (Pitman)  from  —  k  and  —  it 

take  little  longer  to  write  than  one;  but  such  a  joining  is  of  no 
value  as  a  means  of  distinction  apart  from  the  difference  of 
length,  if  it  is  not  clear  from  other  evidence  where  one  charac- 
ter ends  and  the  other  begins,  unless,  for  instance,  there  is  a 
point  of  inflection,  as  in  ^  from  n  and  u  .  In  any  case 
two  continuous  joinings  in  succession  must  generally  be 
avoided,  as  they  make  the  outline  indistinct  and  wanting  in 
sharpness.  It  is  one  of  the  chief  merits  of  Pitman's  Phono- 
graphy that  he  is  enabled  to  avoid  continuous  joinings  in  many 
cases,  and  thus  to  secure  greater  neatness  and  sharpness  of 
outline  than  the  majority  of  geometric  systems,  by  the  use  of 
his  numerous  alternative  characters ;  but,  as  we  shall  see,  from 
want  of  system  and  regularity  in  their  application,  this  advan- 
tage is  only  gained  at  an  enormous  sacrifice. 

In  Longhand,  when  clearly  written,  sharp  angles  predomi- 
nate, two  continuous  joinings  hardly  ever  follow  in  succession. 
Cursive  Shorthand  aims  at  utilising  sharp  angle  joinings  as 
far  as  possible,  and  avoiding  blunt  angles,  and  so  arranges 
matters  that  wherever  blunt  angles  occur,  they  may,  except 
in  very  rare  cases,  be  slurred  or  sharpened  without  detriment 
to  legibility. 

9.  SLOPING  CURVES.  Among  other  generally  recognized 
sources  of  indistinct  outlines  are  the  sloping  curves  _/  x.  \  ( 
which  Taylor  and  others  reject  on  this  ground.  It  is  only  in 
certain  combinations  that  these  characters  are  liable  to  produce 
confusion ;  to  reject  them  altogether  is  to  waste  much  valuable 
stenographic  material.  Pitman  avoids  the  difficulty  by  using 
alternative  characters  for  I,  sh,  and  r,  besides  hooks  for  I,  r, 
and/;  when  the  natural  outline  of  a  word  is  bad,  he  writes  it 
some  other  way.  He  still  retains,  however,  several  outlines 


10  Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

which  I  should  regard  as  not  sufficiently  distinct.  For  in- 
stance, it  is  very  difficult  in  writing  to  keep  the  double-sized  / 

V      ftr,  fdr,  or  fthr,  distinct  from  both   I     f/*,andV fk, 

which  are  outlines  having  the  same  length,  and  similar  slope 
and  curvature,  without  confusing  it  with  some  other  outline, 
such  as  \^y  pn.  Again  pn,  even  in  print  (see  Pitman's 
publications  passim),  may  be  often  mistaken,  when  too  much 

flattened,  for  double-sized  n  x ';    and  similarly   /    N  rm 

for  f         Itr,  Idr,  Ithr ;  or  /"   N  mtr,  mdr,  mthr. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  the  bad  combinations  are  almost 
entirely  avoided  by  the  arrangement  of  the  alphabet :  the  few 
that  remain  are  eliminated  by  using  alternative  characters. 

10.  ALTERNATIVE  CHARACTERS  are  otherwise  objectionable 
as  increasing   the  complexity  of  a  system  and   the  number 
of  possible  ways   of  writing  each  word.     Systems,  however, 
which  do   not  use  them,  must  submit  to   the  worse   evil  of 
indistinct  and  awkward  outlines.    Pitman  utilises  his  numerous 
alternative  ways  of  writing  a  word,  primarily  for  the  purpose  of 
securing  good  outlines,  directing  the  student  generally  to  choose 
for  himself  those  outlines  that  he  finds  clearest  and  easiest. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  the  number  of  alternative  characters 
employed  is  as  small  as  possible.  They  are  used  chiefly  for  the 
purpose  of  securing  clear  outlines:  rules  are  given  in  every  case 
showing  how  this  is  best  effected. 

11.  LINEALITT.     Longhand  is  perfectly  'lineal',  that  is  to 
say,  every  character  returns  to  the  line  of  writing. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  lineality  is  secured  by  giving  to  all 
the  commonest  sounds  characters  which  return  to  the  line  of 

writing,  such  as  w  d,  s~\  b,  \s>  th,  r  I,  A  r,  f  m,  l  n,  fj  nd; 
and  by  using  characters  which  do  not  satisfy  this  condition, 
either  for  the  rarer  sounds,  as  T  >  C  f°r  #>  .1  >  or  mainly  as 
prefixes  and  terminations. 

*  See  T.  A.  Reed,  Review  ofDnploj/e's  Shorthand,  p.  5,  end. 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.  1 1 

12.  USE  OF  SYMBOLS.    By  a  '  symbol '  is  meant  a  hook  or 
circle  or  loop  attached  to  a  character  to  signify  the  addition  of 
some  other  sound,  instead  of  writing  the  latter  by  its  proper 
alphabetic  sign.     The  '  symbols '  in  a  geometric  system  form 
a   kind   of  subsidiary  alphabet.     They  are  used   for  various 
purposes:  by  Pitman  chiefly  as  alternative  characters  to  pro- 
vide clear  outlines  for  words  of  which  the  full  alphabetic  form 
would  involve  awkward  joinings  (see  §  10). 

13.  CIRCLES.    In  Cursive  Shorthand  the  small  circle  is  used 
initially  for  h  (forwards)  and   sh  (backwards),  and  medially 
in  forming  a  whole  class  of  characters,  as  o  /  (ph)  from  <">  p, 

^  th  from  v  t,  <s  ch  from  c  k  (hard  c).  This  arrange- 
ment is  easily  learnt,  and  gives  very  full  employment  to  a 
device  commonly  admitted  to  be  of  the  greatest  utility. 

In  Taylor's  alphabet  several  characters,  such  as  <*—  m  from 
—  s,  \  b  from  \  /  or  v,  f  p  from  |  t,  ^  I  from  /  r, 
are  formed  by  adding  circles  at  the  beginnings  of  other  charac- 
ters. Initial  circles  however  are  much  less  facile  than  medial 
or  final  circles;  and  a  circle  on  a  straight  stem  tends  in  rapid 
writing  to  curve  the  stem,  changing  its  meaning.  A  circle 
between  straight  strokes  in  the  same  direction  (thus  n  .) 
is  particularly  awkward,  and  liable  to  be  miswritten.  The 
circle  is  most  facile  when  it  comes  between  two  curves,  as  in 
x^.a/ ;  or  after  a  curve,  as  in  ^9  f~i>  (^  etc. 

In  a  specimen  of  Taylor  taken  at  random,  three-quarters  of 
the  circles  were  found  to  be  initial,  the  majority  were  applied 
to  straight  strokes,  and  many  of  the  medial  circles  were 
awkward.  In  Cursive  Shorthand  circles  occur  most  commonly 
(i.e.  in  about  90  per  cent,  of  the  cases)  at  the  ends  of  curve 
characters,  in  which  case  they  are  not  liable  to  these  objections; 
initial  circles  are  rare,  and  awkward  circles  very  rare  indeed. 

The  large  circle  is  used  in  Cursive  Shorthand  as  a  prefix  for 
con-,  and  as  a  termination  for  -tion,  -sion.  Used  as  a  prefix  it 
is  always  written  like  the  circle  of  the  letters  a,  d,  q,  in  long- 
hand, and  is  therefore  extremely  facile,  and  never  clashes  with 
the  small  circle.  Pitman  appropriates  circles  entirely  to  the 


12          Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

representation  of  s  and  z :  this  hardly  gives  sufficient  scope 
to  so  useful  a  device. 

14.  HOOKS  are  a  very  common  stenographic  device.     They 
are  objectionable  as  limiting  seriously  the  compactness  of  the 
writing,  because  the  characters  must  be  made  large  in  com- 
parison, or  they  may  be  confused  with  the  hooks.    Medial  hooks 
often  present  awkward,  and  sometimes  impossible  joinings. 
Professor  Everett  uses  hooks  very  sparingly,  and  even  of  the 
few  that  he  uses  he  says:  "The  hooked  letters,  though  neat  in 
appearance,  and  convenient  for  leisurely  writing,  are  particu- 
larly liable  to  be  spoiled  in  scribbling".    From  my  own  ex- 
perience of  Pitman's  system  I  can  fully  endorse  the  Professor's 
statement.     In  rapid  writing  hooks  are  often  so  badly  formed 
as  to  be  misread  for  ticks  or  circles,  and  accidental  hooks, 
changing  entirely  the  meaning  of  an  outline,  are  liable  to  be 
introduced  in  the  endeavour  to  sharpen  a  blunt  angle  or  ease 
the  hand.    If  a  hook  is  made  too  large  it  may  often  be 
mistaken  for  a  half-size  character.     Pitman  uses  two  sizes  of 
hooks,  which  considerably  aggravates  the  difficulty. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  very  few  hooks  are  used.  They  are 
carefully  selected,  and  restricted  to  cases  in  which  they  cannot 
clash  with  other  characters.  They  are  not  applied  to  straight 
strokes,  because  they  tend  to  produce  curvature.  Medial  hooks 
are  entirely  avoided  except  in  cases  where  they  facilitate  a 
joining. 

15.  LOOPS.     The  only  really  facile  loops  are  those  which 

occur  in  longhand  in  the  letters  \  7j  &  *J~  ,  etc.  These  are 
largely  used  in  Cursive  Shorthand  and  give  very  facile  and  dis- 
tinctive characters:  for  example  V  •¥  I,  A-  A  »',  CZ  ngg  as  in 
anger,  y.  ngk  as  in  inker,  anchor. 

Pitman  uses  loops  for  st,  str  in  certain  cases,  applied  to  the 
stems  of  other  characters,  thus :  \»  pst.  Thus  used  they  are 
not  generally  facile,  they  often  present  bad  joinings,  which 
have  to  be  avoided  by  arbitrarily  writing  the  word  some  other 
way.  They  are  also  very  liable  to  be  miswritten,  or  to  curve 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.  13 


the  character;  compare  the  Pitman  outlines  V>  fst,  \  pst. 
A  strictly  geometric  system  is  in  its  very  nature  unable  to 
utilise  the  facile  loops  adequately. 

16.  DETACHED  VOWEL  MAKKS.  Nearly  all  geometric  systems 
are  driven  to  the  use  of  detached  vowel  marks,  whenever  they 
desire  to  write  a  word  clearly.  These  marks  consist  of  dots, 
dashes,  circles  and  angles  (such  as . .  i  i  0  v  £-  o  c ),  which  have  to 
be  placed  carefully  in  position  close  to  the  consonants  to  which 
they  belong.  The  position  is  important  because  the  dot  or  dash 
slightly  misplaced  may  mean  something  quite  different. 

The  following  passage*,  engraved  in  Pitman's  Phonography, 
will  serve  to  illustrate  both  the  care  with  which  the  detached 
vowel  marks  must  be  located,  and  the  necessity  of  inserting 
vowels  to  distinguish  words.  The  reader  should  also  notice 
particularly  the  distinction  between  light  and  heavy  dots  and 
ticks,  and  thick  and  thin  strokes. 

A    A    ,   A  A,  A  -A  .  A.  4x  A   <1   '  A, 
•XI   -A ,  1    '  */l    A ,   '  -A   A  ^  '  -A 
•A4,C'44,'A.4,^.AAA, 
^  A    '  A  A  c   '  4-   A ,  /•  A    '  A.   A, 
•A    ^    A  ,    N    A     .   A    4        A    ^x 

*  The  key  and  explanation  of  this  passage  will  be  found,  together 
with  the  Cursive  Shorthand  version,  on  p.  92.  The  reader  must  not  sup- 
pose that  it  is  an  exhaustive  list  of  all  the  words  that  can  be  written  with 
this  outline  in  Pitman's  system.  A  few  of  them,  those  that  begin  with  h 
or  end  with  -ing,  can  be  written  in  other  ways :  but  there  are  several  other 
words  (such  as  erode,  errata,  rid,  rideau,  redo,  arrete,  radiated,  etc. ), 

which  might  have  been  included,  having  the  same  outline  /\  rt,  and 
differing  only  in  detached  marks  and  thickening;  and  there  are  large 
classes  of  words  (such  as  riddle,  etc.,  ordain,  retain,  etc.,  rotating,  re- 
treating, etc.,  writer,  reader,  etc.,  roared,  etc.),  having  outlines,  either 
identical  with  some  of  the  above,  or  so  similar  to  them  that  it  would  be 
difficult  to  distinguish  them  safely  in  rapid  writing. 

C.  2 


14  Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 


The  congonant  outline  of  each  word  is  written  first,  and  the 
vowels  are  dotted  in  afterwards  in  their  proper  places.  This  is 
called  '  vocalizing '  the  outline.  The  writer  has  to  go  over  each 
word  twice,  in  a  highly  artificial  and  unnatural  order,  if  he  wants 
to  put  in  the  vowels,  that  is  to  say,  if  he  wishes  his  writing  to 
be  legible  (see  §  27). 

This  very  serious  and  oft-repeated  objection  is  so  generally 
admitted,  even  by  the  partisans  of  Pitman's  system,  that  it 
would  be  waste  of  time  to  argue  the  point,  were  it  not  that 
special  attention  was  given  to  detached  vowels  in  the  chrono- 
graphic  experiments,  the  results  of  which  seem  to  throw  some 
light  on  the  question. 

It  is  often  maintained  that  a  detached  vowel  mark  counts 
in  loss  of  time  only  about  as  much  as  an  extra  lifting  of  the 
pen.  This  is  very- far  from  true.  In  addition  to  the  lifting  of 
the  pen  there  is  the  time  occupied  in  making  the  stroke  or  dot 
and  locating  it  carefully  in  its  proper  position.  This  is  not 
unnaturally  found  to  be  longer  than  the  time  required  for  the 
mere  making  of  the  same  number  of  dots  and  ticks  irrespective 
of  position.  Besides  this,  detached  vowels  usually  involve 
hesitation:  after  finishing  the  consonant  outline  the  writer 
has  to  make  up  his  mind  what  vowels  to  insert  and  where,  or 
whether  he  can  leave  the  outline  unvocalized :  with  unskilful 
writers  this  is  a  fruitful  source  of  loss  of  time :  with  skilful 
writers  it  is  often  almost  unnoticeable.  But  the  most  serious 
hesitation  generally  occurs,  and  this  even  with  very  skilful 
writers,  after  inserting  the  vowels  and  before  proceeding  to  the 
next  word.  This  is  most  strongly  marked  after  inserting  two 
or  more  vowels  in  one  outline.  It  is  probably  due  to  the 
illogical  order  in  which  the  vowels  are  written.  The  mind 
momentarily  loses  its  place  in  the  sentence,  and  has  to  go 
back  and  pick  up  the  lost  thread,  so  as  to  find  what  comes 
next.  The  result  is  that  the  insertion  of  detached  vowel  marks 
always  involves  such  a  disproportionate  expenditure  of  time, 
that  they  must  be  omitted  in  writing  at  any  reasonable  speed. 

The  reader  must  understand  that  we  are  here  dealing  with 
very  small  intervals  of  time,  such  as  a  few  tenths  of  a  second : 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.  15 

that  it  is  difficult  to  take  account  of  such  small  periods  or  make 
any  accurate  observations  upon  them,  otherwise  than  by  means 
of  an  automatic  record,  which  can  be  read  at  leisure  and  com- 
pared with  the  actual  writing. 

A  distinction  is  theoretically  made  between  a  light  dot  for 
the  short  vowels  a,  e,  i,  and  a  heavy  dot  for  the  long  vowels 
ah,  ay,  ee.  Practically  this  distinction  cannot  be  clearly  made 
in  writing,  and  is  often  badly  given  even  in  printed  specimens. 
In  the  attempt  to  preserve  it  the  light  dot  is  frequently  made 
so  evanescent  as  to  be  mistaken  for  a  flaw  in  the  paper  or 
altogether  missed ;  such  minute  distinctions  are  very  trying  to 
the  eyes  in  reading. 

The  chief  advantage  of  detached  vowels  is  that  they  present 
an  appearance  of  brevity,  and  look  neat,  especially  in  print. 
They  are  so  inconspicuous  that  the  inexperienced  eye  does  not 
realize  the  difficulty  of  inserting  them  accurately,  and  takes 
no  account  of  the  aerial  movements  of  the  pen  which  their 
insertion  involves. 

To  illustrate  what  is  meant  by  the  'aerial  movements  of 
the  pen',  we  subjoin  a  short  sentence  carefully  engraved  in 
Pitman's  shorthand,  in  which  these  movements  are  indicated 
by  faint  dotted  lines  showing  the  order  in  which  each  vowel  is 
inserted. 


The  sentence  represented  is  as  follows  : — "Detached  vowel 
marks  always  involve  disproportionate  expenditure  of  time". 

The  sounds  are  written  in  the  following  order : — 
dtchtea  vlowe  mr-ksah   awlwseh    invlvo    dsrppr-s/mtoawe 
ekspndtr-eiyu  of  tmei. 

(The  italicized  letters  represent  sounds  which  are  expressed, 
not  by  their  alphabetic  characters,  but  by  abbreviations ;  the 
hyphens  represent  indicated  vowels,  and  the  spaces  lifts  of  the 
pen.) 

2—2 


16  Conditions  of  Facility  and,  Cieanwaf. 


We  have  followed  the  Dictionary*  outlines,  except  that  we 
have  ventured  to  spell  the  word  expenditure  with  a  d,  and  to 
write  the  word  always  in  full.  Initial  vowels  are  supposed  to 
be  written  first  for  the  sake  of  the  logical  order,  and  to  save 
distance  traversed.  The  first  vowel  in  the  word  disproportionate 
cannot  be  clearly  inserted,  and  the  r  hook  cannot  be  properly 
made.  The  way  in  which  each  word  is  accented  can  only  be 
marked  by  inserting  small  crosses  near  the  accented  vowels. 

For  the  sake  of  contrast  we  give  the  same  sentence  in 
Cursive  Shorthand,  written  on  the  same  scale. 


It  is  evident  that  this  is  not  only  much  briefer,  but  also 
more  facile  and  lineal  than  the  Pitman  version.  Moreover  it 
represents  much  more  accurately  the  correct  pronunciation  of 
the  words,  and  shows  in  addition  exactly  how  each  word  is 
accented.  Every  sound  is  fully  expressed  in  its  natural  order. 
The  dotted  lines  are  therefore  not  really  required,  and  only 
serve  to  confuse  the  outlines.  They  are  inserted  to  make  the 
specimen  match  the  Pitman  version  as  exactly  as  possible. 
There  are  twenty-  six  lifts  of  the  pen  in  Pitman's  (omitting  one 
vowel),  as  against  fifteen  in  the  Cursive  version;  and  the 
'aerial  movements'  involved  in  the  latter  are  much  shorter 
and  easier. 

Enough  has  been  said  to  show  that  detached  vowels  are  far 
interior  to  joined  vowels  in  point  of  speed  and  clearness.  This 
is  indeed  generally  admitted.  But  after  all,  so  their  advocates 
argue,  these  detached  vowel  marks  are  rarely  required.  In 
reporting,  they  say,  only  one  vowel  in  every  twenty  words 
on  the  average,  is  needed  to  make  Pitman  notes  (if  they  are 
well  enough  written  and  the  subject  is  not  too  technical) 
decipherable  without  serious  errors,  with  the  aid  of  the 
memory  and  the  context. 

This  line  of  argument  altogether  misses  the  point.  One 
vowel  in  twenty  words  may  be  sufficient  for  reporting,  if  the 

•  Pitman's  Phonographic  Dictionary,  5th  Ed.  1884. 


Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness.          17 

reporter  is  sufficiently  skilful  and  has  succeeded  in  learning 
all  the  conventional  outlines.  But  vowels  cannot  be  thus 
omitted  in  Pitman's  system  without  the  most  serious  loss  of 
legibility,  such  as  would  make  it  quite  unsuitable  for  general 
purposes ;  and,  in  point  of  fact,  they  are  not  so  omitted  in  the 
published  specimens  of  the  'corresponding'  style.  Taking  a 
printed  specimen  of  this  style  at  random,  it  was  found  that, 
excluding  grammalogues  and  special  abbreviations,  more  than 
one  hundred  and  sixty  vowels  on  the  average  were  inserted  in 
every  hundred  words.  Some  of  these  vowels,  no  doubt,  might 
have  been  omitted  if  Pitman's  Phonography  possessed  a  reliable 
system  of  vowel  indication :  since,  however,  it  does  not,  it  is 
the  more  dependent  on  the  aid  of  detached  marks  for  legibility. 

If  the  young  reporter  starts  with  the  resolution  of  omitting 
all  vowels,  and  is  prepared  to  face  the  difficulty  of  reading, 
detached  vowel  marks  are  all  very  well;  there  is  no  difficulty 
about  omitting  them,  and  if  he  does  not  intend  to  use  them,  he 
need  not  waste  his  time  in  learning  them*.  But  in  shorthand 
for  general  purposes  vowels  cannot  be  thus  neglected,  and  their 
expression  by  detached  marks  is  therefore  a  fatal  objection  to 
the  general  utility  of  a  system,  though,  as  we  shall  see,  it  is 
by  no  means  the  only,  or  even  the  chief  objection  to  which 
Pitman's  system  is  liable. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  expression  of  vowels  by  joined 
characters  or  '  by  mode ',  is  much  clearer  and  does  not  involve 
the  same  disproportionate  expenditure  of  time,  so  that  it  is 
possible  to  write  words  in  full  at  a  reasonable  speed.  In 
reporting  at  high  rates  of  speed,  words  cannot  be  written  in 
full ;  but  it  by  no  means  follows  that  recourse  must  be  had  to 
the  wholesale  omission  of  vowels.  The  expression  of  vowels 
in  the  outline,  enables  us  to  employ  better  and  more  rational 
methods  of  abbreviation. 

17.  'LIFTS'  OF  THE  PEN.  '  MODES'.  The  time  occupied 
in  lifting  the  pen  and  replacing  it  on  the  paper,  supposing  there 

*  Many  systems  make  no  provision  for  the  distinction  of  vowel  sounds. 
Many  Pitmanite  reporters  never  insert  them,  but  trust  to  memory  and 
context. 


18          Conditions  of  Facility  and  Clearness. 

to  be  no  hesitation  between  the  words,  varies  according  to  cir- 
cumstances from  one-  to  three-tenths  of  a  second ;  but  is  rarely 
so  small  as  one-tenth.  It  depends  of  course  on  the  nature  and 
direction  of  the  movements  before  and  after :  the  lift  involved 
in  travelling  backwards  to  dot  in  a  vowel  is  one  of  the  worst. 
An  ordinary  '  lift '  takes  a  little  longer  than  the  description  of 
the  quickest  connecting  stroke  (not  necessarily  the  shortest), 
but  takes  less  time  than  a  connecting  stroke  which  involves  an 
awkward  joining. 

Thus  Professor  Everett's  '  modes '  of  expressing  vowels  by 
lifting  the  pen  and  writing  the  consonants  in  position,  are  by 
no  means  so  slow  as  Pitman  would  have  us  believe.  They  are 
in  fact  very  far  superior  to  detached  marks  in  point  of  speed, 
facility,  and  clearness,  and  possess  the  further  advantage  of 
expressing  the  vowel  in  its  logical  order  between  the  consonants. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  detached  dots  are  used,  as  in  longhand, 
for  punctuation,  and  to  mark  abbreviated  words.  They  are 
also  occasionally  used  as  diacritics,  like  the  t'-dots  in  longhand. 

Expression  by  mode  is  employed  for  various  subsidiary 
purposes,  those  modes  being  chosen  (Everett's  nos.  2,  3,  4) 
which  are  always  applicable  and  clear. 

CONDITIONS   OF   SIMPLICITY. 

18.  A  system  of  shorthand  for  general  use  must  be  simple 
and  easy  to  learn :  few  people  can  afford  to  spend  a  lifetime 
in  acquiring  it.  It  is  far  best  in  every  way  that  shorthand 
should  be  taught,  like  ordinary  writing  and  reading,  at  a  very 
early  stage ;  it  should  therefore  be  made  as  simple  as  possible, 
and  should  be  independent  of  the  ordinary  spelling. 

It  is  difficult  to  make  a  system  of  shorthand  at  once  simple 
and  complete.  It  is  very  easy  to  secure  an  appearance  of  sim- 
plicity by  making  the  system  incomplete,  by  suppressing  points 
of  difficulty  which  are  certain  to  meet  the  student  sooner  or 
later,  or  by  giving  vague  general  directions  and  loosely  worded 
rules ;  by  telling  the  student  for  instance  to  write  according  to 
sound,  and  leaving  him  to  find  out  for  himself  how  it  is  to  be 
done,  or  by  giving  him  several  alternative  ways  of  writing  a  word 
and  leaving  him  to  choose  which  is  the  clearest  and  easiest. 


Conditions  of  Simplicity.  19 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  I  have  spared  no  pains  to  avoid  this 
fault.  I  have  endeavoured  to  foresee  and  to  illustrate  every 
difficulty  which  the  learner  is  likely  to  experience,  and  to  make 
the  rules  so  definite  that  any  given  sound  cannot  be  correctly 
written  in  more  than  one  way.  I  can  hardly  hope  to  have 
completely  succeeded  at  the  first  attempt,  but  it  is  undoubt- 
edly a  step  in  the  right  direction  and  will  commend  itself  to  all 
who  seriously  desire  to  utilise  shorthand  for  practical  purposes. 

It  is  of  no  use  to  make  a  system  simple  without  making  it 
complete  and  accurate.  Systems  which,  like  Taylor's,  content 
themselves  with  writing  the  consonants  only,  may  have  the 
merit  of  simplicity,  but  will  always  be  found  unsatisfactory  for 
any  sort  of  work  where  accuracy  and  legibility  are  essential. 

19.  WRITING  BY  SOUND.  It  is  by  this  time  agreed  by  all 
good  authorities  that  a  system  of  shorthand  to  be  simple,  con- 
sistent, and  complete,  must  be  Phonetic.  It  must  discard  the 
inconsistencies  and  difficulties  of  the  common  orthography.  It 
is  almost  impossible  to  make  a  system  represent  consistently 
and  simply  the  endless  variety  of  combinations  in  the  common 
spelling :  but  it  is  quite  practicable  to  represent  with  sufficient 
accuracy  the  comparatively  small  number  of  sounds  which  are 
used  to  distinguish  words  in  speech. 

In  constructing  Cursive  Shorthand  I  have  made  it  as 
strictly  phonetic  as  is  practically  possible.  This  not  only 
renders  it  more  complete  and  self-consistent,  but  considerably 
enhances  its  educational  value,  especially  as  a  training  in 
correct  pronunciation. 

The  phonetic  principle  itself  is  not  altogether  free  from 
disadvantages.  Phonetic  spelling,  though  much  simpler  than 
the  received  spelling,  presents  some  difficulties  to  beginners, 
who  seldom  realise  at  all  accurately  how  they  pronounce,  till 
their  attention  is  specially  directed  to  the  subject.  Moreover, 
all  people  do  not  pronounce  exactly  alike ;  hence  slight  varia- 
tions of  spelling  may  arise  in  a  phonetic  system  corresponding 
to  variations  of  pronunciation. 

In  order  to  minimize  these  disadvantages,  I  have  published 


20  Conditions  of  Simplicity. 


a  separate  pamphlet*  explaining  in  considerable  detail  the 
phonetic  notation  and  the  standard  of  pronunciation  which  are 
adopted  as  the  groundwork  of  the  present  system. 

One  of  the  commonest  objections  to  phonetic  spelling  is 
that  it  confuses  words,  such  as  write,  right,  rite,  which  are 
pronounced  alike  but  differ  in  meaning  and  orthography.  This 
objection  is  not  serious,  because  such  words  are  comparatively 
rare,  and  are  scarcely  more  likely  to  cause  confusion  in  cor- 
respondence than  in  speech.  In  writing  from  dictation  it  is 
actually  a  disadvantage  to  have  different  outlines  for  words 
which  are  pronounced  alike,  because  it  is  often  impossible 
to  tell,  till  the  end  of  a  sentence,  which  word  is  intended. 

20.  WRITING  BY  ALPHABET.  Further,  in  order  to  be  easy 
to  learn,  a  system  must  be  Alphabetic.  It  must  be  capable  of 
representing  all  words  with  neatness  and  precision  by  means  of 
a  few  fundamental  forms,  the  characters  of  the  alphabet,  com- 
bined according  to  strict  and  simple  rules.  It  must  not  be 
encumbered  with  a  multitude  of  arbitrary  signs  and  abbrevia- 
tions. It  must  not  abound  in  special  exceptions  made  in  favour 
of  individual  words.  For  although  such  devices  impart  brevity 
to  the  writing,  and  may  be  of  use  to  men  whose  life  is  spent  in 
reporting,  they  are  an  immense  tax  upon  the  memory  and 
make  a  system  quite  useless  for  ordinary  purposes. 

The  majority  of  geometric  systems  which  employ  symbols 
freely,  cannot  be  called  strictly  '  alphabetic '.  For  instance  in 
Pitman's,  \  represents  p,  and  ^  or  ~\  r,  but  \  represents 
pr  as  in  person  or  prison:  the  symbol  representing  the  r  is  a 
hook,  which  not  only  has  no  similarity  to  either  character  for 
r,  but  also  comes  fee/ore t  the  p.  Again,  (.  represents  th  and 
)  s,  but  J  represents,  not  sr,  but  thr.  Moreover  all  these 
combinations  may  have  other  symbols  attached  at  the  end, 
and  may  be  halved  to  add  t  or  d,  or  lengthened  for  tr,  dr,  or  thr. 

*  Phonetic  Spelling,  by  H.  L.  Callendar.    Same  publishers. 

t  The  use  of  the  initial  nooks  to  add  r  and  I  after  a  consonant,  though 
strictly  speaking  illogical,  is  doubtless  a  matter  of  practical  convenience 
at  the  beginning  of  a  word;  but  when  medial  they  often  join  awkwardly 
and  thus  entail  special  devices. 


Conditions  of  Simplicity.  21 

Any  such  combination  must  be  regarded  as  a  single  whole, 
or '  compendium ',  and  not  as  being  made  up  of  separate  charac- 
ters. The  number  of  such  possible  compendiums  in  Pitman's 
system  is  very  great,  and  largely  increases  the  mental  effort 
required  for  writing  and  reading. 

The  worst  objection  to  the  extensive  use  of  compendiums, 
unless  governed  by  very  strict  rules,  is  the  variety  of  outlines 
with  which  the  same  sound  may  be  written,  and  the  consequent 
endless  hesitation  in  choosing  between  the  different  possible 
ways  of  writing  a  word. 

Pocknell  (Legible  Shorthand)  does  not  employ  the  halving 
and  lengthening  principle,  and  although  he  uses  symbols 
freely,  his  method  is  not  liable  to  the  above  objections ;  each 
letter  has  a  separate  recognizable  representation,  written  in 
its  logical  order,  and  used  according  to  strict  rules  of  vowel 
indication. 

Cursive  Shorthand  is  very  strictly  alphabetic,  and  avoids 
the  use  of  arbitrary  signs.  It  employs  but  few  compound 
consonants,  and  these  are  generated  by  simply  combining  their 
component  characters  in  the  clearest  possible  way ;  the  use  of 
these  compounds  is  governed  by  one  strict  and  simple  rule,  so 
that  no  hesitation  can  arise  from  uncertainty  as  to  when  they 
should  be  used. 

CONDITIONS  OF  LEGIBILITY. 

21.  The  word  'legible'  is  not  used  as  synonymous  with 
'  decipherable '.  The  ideal  of  legibility  is  that  each  word  when 
correctly  written  should  be  readily  and  instantaneously  dis- 
tinguishable from  every  other  word  without  reference  to  the 
memory  or  the  context.  The  more  nearly  a  system  approaches 
this  ideal,  the  greater  its  claim  to  rank  as  '  legible '. 

A  system  which  does  not  express  vowels  and  often  includes 
twenty  or  thirty  words  under  the  same  outline,  can  only  be 
deciphered  by  guess-work,  and  cannot  with  any  truth  claim  to 
be  as  'legible  as  print'.  The  context,  to  which  so  many  steno- 
graphers trust,  is  often  a  very  unreliable  means  of  distinction. 
As  Mr  T.  A.  Eeed  says:  "I  am  disposed  to  think  that  it  is 
possible  for  any  two  words,  however  dissimilar  in  character  or 


22  Conditions  of  Legibility. 

meaning,  to  be  so  placed  as  to  render  it  difficult  to  tell  by  the 
context  which  is  intended". 

SIMPLICITY  is  one  of  the  conditions  of  legibility.  If 
a  system  is  too  complicated  in  the  number  of  possible  forms 
and  combinations  of  its  characters,  or  too  involved  in  the 
application  of  the  rules  which  determine  its  outlines,  it  will 
be  difficult  to  read  in  proportion  to  the  intricacy  of  the  mental 
operations  required  to  decipher  it. 

FACILITY  is  another  of  the  conditions  of  legibility.  If 
a  system  cannot  be  written  easily,  it  will  probably  be  written 
badly,  and  will  therefore  be  difficult  to  read. 

Under  this  heading  I  have  already  discussed  most  of  the 
conditions  which  depend  upon  sharpness  of  outline,  and  on  the 
clearness  and  ease  with  which  the  hand  can  make  the  required 
distinctions  between  the  characters.  The  conditions  which  I 
now  proceed  to  consider  are  important  even  if  the  writing  be 
engraved  with  the  greatest  skill  and  care,  so  that  each  character 
is  unmistakeable. 

The  general  condition  of  legibility  in  a  phonetic  system 

is    that     SIMILAR     SOUNDS     SHOULD     BE    REPRESENTED   BY    SIMILAR 

SIGNS,  and  conversely  different  sounds  by  different  signs.  It 
is  one  great  advantage  of  a  phonetic  system  that  if  this 
condition  is  observed  a  slight  error  in  reading  or  writing  will 
correspond  to  a  slight  error  in  sound,  so  that  the  word  though 
wrongly  read  or  written  may  still  be  recognizable.  On  the 
other  hand  a  considerable  difference  in  sound  will  correspond 
to  a  considerable  difference  in  outline,  so  that  words  of  different 
sound  will  not  be  likely  to  clash*.  In  longhand  the  forms  of 
the  letters  have  no  relation  to  their  sounds,  and  the  writing  is 
less  legible  than  it  would  have  been  if  any  definite  phonetic 
plan  had  been  adopted. 

Alternative  characters  such  as  bear  no  resemblance  to 
each  other,  and  especially  'symbols'  (as  defined  in  §  12), 
are  objectionable  because  they  violate  this  principle,  in  that 
the  same  sound  is  represented  by  different  signs. 

*  It  is  a  common  mistake  to  suppose  that  Pitman's  system  satisfies 
this  condition ;  very  dissimilar  words  often  have  the  same  outline  in  his 
'phonography'  (see  p.  27,  near  end). 


Conditions  of  Legibility.  23 

22.  ONE  WORD,  ONE  OUTLINE.     If  similar  sounds  should 
be  represented  by  similar  signs,  a  fortiori  the  same  word, 
apart  from  variations   of  pronunciation,   should   always  be 
represented  by  the  same  sign*.     Of  equal  importance  is  the 
complementary  principle  that  different  words   should  be  re- 
presented by  different  signs. 

These  are  two  most  essential  conditions  of  legibility,  apart 
from  all  question  of  good  or  bad  writing ;  but  it  is  un- 
doubtedly very  difficult  to  satisfy  both  at  once.  This  was 
in  fact  far  the  most  serious  difficulty  encountered  in  construct- 
ing the  present  system. 

The  variety  of  material  supplied  must  be  sufficient  for 
the  distinction  of  all  such  words  as  differ  in  sound,  and 
at  the  same  time  the  rules  must  be  made  so  strict  and 
definite  that  the  same  word  cannot  be  correctly  written  in 
several  different  ways.  The  pages  of  illustrative  matter  in  the 
exposition  of  the  present  system  are  mainly  devoted  to  explain- 
ing how  words  should  be  correctly  written,  so  fully  and  precisely 
that  all  learners  may  naturally  write  them  alike  from  the 
outset.  It  is  not  enough  to  say  to  the  student,  'Here  are 
your  characters:  select  those  joinings  which  you  find  the 
best  and  clearest.'  It  is  necessary  to  point  out  definitely  in 
each  case  which  characters  are  to  be  used. 

23.  Most  authors  are  agreed  with  regard  to  the  importance 
of  distinguishing  different  words,  and,  in  order  to  satisfy  this 
condition,  they  generally  provide  such  a  superabundance  of 
material — thick  and  thin  strokes,  symbols,  detached  vowels,  and 
many  different  lengths  and  directions  of  character — that  they 
find  it  impossible  to  satisfy  the  other  condition.     Sometimes 
they  admit  the  failure  as  a  misfortune,  sometimes  they  glory 
in  the  '  endless  variety  of  possible  outlines '  without  appearing 
to  notice  its  drawbacks ;  sometimes  they  deny  that  it  has  any 
disadvantages,   and  refuse  to  recognize  the   importance    of 
laying  down  strict  rules,  and  of  always  writing  the  same  word 
in  the  same  way. 

*  Except,  of  course,  as  regards  simple  omission ;  part  of  a  word  may 
be  omitted  for  convenience  in  phrasing  or  abbreviation:  this  is  not  the 
same  thing  as  admitting  several  different  outlines  for  a  fully  written  word. 


24  Conditions  of  Legibility. 

On  this  point  we  entirely  agree  with  Mr  Pitman,  who 
says*:  "It  is  essential  to  easy  and  fluent  writing  that  every 
word  should  always  be  written  in  the  same  way  ". 

Butt :  "  Seeing  that  in  the  Phonographic  Alphabet  [Pitman's] 
s  and  r  have  duplicate  forms,  that  sh  and  I  may  be  written 
either  upward  or  downward,  that  w  and  y  have  both  vowel  and 
consonant  forms,  that  h  may  be  written  by  its  consonant  form 
(up  or  down),  or  by  a  joined  tick,  or  a  dot;  also  that  many 
groups  of  consonants  may  be  expressed  either  by  their  alphabetic 
forms  or  by  abbreviations  [symbols],  it  is  evident  that  a  large 
number  of  words  may  be  written  in  more  than  one  way." 
That  is  to  say,  in  a  very  large  number  of  cases  the  same  word 
may  (apart  from  all  variations  of  pronunciation)  be  correctly 
represented  (as  far  as  the  rules  are  concerned)  by  several 
(sometimes  two  or  three  hundred)  different  signs.  Not  only 
are  these  signs  different,  but  they  bear  as  a  rule  not 
the  vaguest  resemblance  to  each  other.  The  hooks,  circles, 
loops,  bear  no  resemblance  whatever  to  the  alphabetic  cha- 
racters of  the  letters  I,  r,  f,  v,  n,  s,  z,  st,  str,  which  they 
represent :  and  to  halve  the  length  of  a  stroke  is  not  in  the 
least  like  adding  d  or  t  to  it. 

24.  The  primary  object  of  this  variety  is  the  avoidance 
of  the  straggling  outlines  that  arise  from  the  inadequacy  of 
the  alphabet  (see  p.  34).  Unfortunately  it  "  opens  the  door  to 
a  diversity  of  stenographic  representation  for  some  words,  and 
casts  on  the  writer  the  necessity  of  deciding  which  form  is 
most  convenient "  J.  The  resulting  confusion  has  been  in  some 
measure  alleviated  by  the  publication  of  a  Phonographic  Dic- 
tionary, which  is  intended  to  relieve  the  student  of  the  labour 
of  choosing  for  himself  which  of  several  possible  outlines  is 
most  convenient  and  correct. 

It  is  one  of  the  chief  advantages  of  a  phonetic  system  that 
words  can  be  written  by  ear  without  reference  to  the  spelling ; 
tin's  advantage  is  lost  when  it  becomes  necessary  to  learn 
correct  outlines  from  a  dictionary. 

*  Manual,  p.  43,  §  139  (note).    Ed.  1886. 
t  Manual,  p.  46,  §  153.    Ed.  1886. 
j  Dictionary,  Preface.    Ed.  1884. 


Coitditioiis  of  Leyibility.  25 


In  this  respect  there  is  a  close  analogy  between  Pitman's 
system  of  shorthand  and  the  common  orthography.  Just  as 
in  learning  to  spell,  the  correct  spelling  of  individual  words 
must  be  learnt,  so  in  Pitman's  system  the  student  must  learn 
the  correct  outlines. 

In  Phonography  the  choice  of  a  correct  outline  of  a  word 
is  not  made  entirely  at  haphazard,  similarly  in  common 
spelling  there  are  many  elastic  and  general  relations  between 
the  sound  and  the  orthography ;  but  the  exceptions  are  so 
numerous,  that  you  cannot  from  the  analogy  of  any  number 
of  cases  deduce  with  certainty  the  correct  result  in  any  other 
case  however  similar. 

The  difficulty  of  learning  Phonography,  like  that  of  learn- 
ing to  spell,  is  consequently  very  great.  In  fact,  as  Mr  Pitman 
himself  writes,  "  Fonography  is  undoutedly  not  a  thing  to  be 
lerned  without  a  littel  truble".  Most  of  our  readers  have 
probably  long  since  forgotten  the  weary  toil  of  learning  to 
spell,  and  will  hardly  be  able  to  realize  the  force  of  our  com- 
parison :  but  Pitmanites,  at  any  rate,  who  are  ardent  spelling 
reformers,  will  appreciate  its  full  significance. 

The  number  of  alternative  characters  even  in  Pitman's 
alphabet  is  small  compared  with  the  number  of  words  in  the 
language.  If  the  usage  of  the  alternative  characters  were 
denned  by  strict  rules,  a  dictionary  would  not  be  required. 
The  absence  of  strict  rules,  although  it  makes  a  system  appear 
simpler  at  first  sight,  is  in  reality  attended  with  serious  dif- 
ficulties, because  it  compels  the  writer,  if  he  does  not  wish  to 
acquire  a  style  peculiar  to  himself  and  illegible  to  others,  to 
learn  the  correct  outlines  of  individual  words. 

25.  But  we  have  been  assuming  hitherto  that  the  Dic- 
tionary in  question  is  a  recognised  and  absolute  standard*  of 
correct  Phonography.  If  it  were  so,  Pitman's  system,  like  the 
common  orthography,  "in  spite  of  its  complexity  and  its  many 
glaring  defects  "f,  would  still  be  a  practical  system.  In  reality 

*  As  a  matter  of  fact  it  is  very  imperfect.  Many  of  the  most  puzzling 
words  are  omitted,  especially  those  whose  outlines  are  awkward  or  un- 
certain. 

t  Standard,  Sept,  26, 1887. 


26  Conditions  of  Legibility. 


the  comparison  is  altogether  unfair  to  the  common  orthography, 
for  not  only  is  the  possible  variety  of  phonographic  outline 
much  greater  than  the  possible  variety  of  spelling  on  any 
reasonable  analogies,  but  whereas  the  common  orthography  is 
exceedingly  strict  and  definite,  the  usage  of  distinction  by 
outline,  even  among  skilful  phonographers  and  in  printed 
specimens,  is  far  from  regular  and  uniform. 

In  fact  so  great  is  the  possible  variety  of  outline  in  Plw- 
nography  and  so  elastic  are  the  rules  that  Mr  Pitman  has 
not  after  fifty  years  succeeded  in  establishing  uniformity 
even  in  the  text-books  published  by  himself.  To  take  one 
instance,  out  of  many  that  might  be  given ;  La  the  Reporter, 
p.  28*,  the  outline  for  cart  (or  according  to)  is  given  as  c-  , 
which  properly  stands  for  a  word  of  the  form  kr-t  as  crate  ; 
on  p.  43,  the  outline  given  for  cart  (also  carat,  accurate,  and 

curate)  is  '  ,  which  properly  stands  for  a  word  of  the  form 

k-r-t  as  carrot;  but  in  the  Piionographic  Dictionary  the  form 

given  is   x,,  which  could  hardly  be  distinguished  in  rapid 

writing  from          \  care  (the  latter  word  may  also  be  written 
c —  ,  like  acre,  crow,  occur). 

Again,  it  is  very  desirable  that  in  a  series  of  related  words 
the  same  syllable  should  always  be  written  in  the  same  way. 
Here  Mr  Pitman  apparently  gives  up  the  attempt  to  maintain 
consistency:  every  page  of  the  Dictionary  is  crowded  with 
illustrations  of  the  disregard  of  this  obvious  principle. 

Take  for  instance  the  word  critic,  which  is  written 
krtk ;  in  order  to  form  critical,  it  ought  only  to  be  necessary 
to  add  the  syllable  -al:  instead  of  that,  Mr  Pitman  writes  the 
first  syllable  in  an  altogether  different  way,  and  puts  a  hook 
before  the  final  k,  adding  nothing  at  all  at  the  end ;  the  result 
« —  krtkl,  does  not  in  the  least  suggest  the  form  of  the 
original  word  critic. 

*  See  also  Manual,  p.  46.  Ed.  1886.  It  is  necessary  to  note  the  par- 
ticular edition  because  changes  are  always  being  made.  I  expended  in 
1887  upwards  of  10s.  on  a  new  set  of  Pitman's  instruction  books.  I  find 
that  several  changes  have  already  been  made  since  then. 


Condition  of  Legibility.  27 

Or  take  again  the  word  cart,  and  compare  the  derivatives ; 
*J  krtj,  cartage;        ~~\\    krtr,  carter;      ^    krtt,  carted. 

These  are  by  no  means  exceptional  cases.     There  would  be  no 
difficulty  in  giving  thousands  of  similar  examples. 

We  do  not  say  that  starting  with  Mr  Pitman's  methods  and 
materials  it  would  have  been  possible  to  achieve  a  better  result : 
the  success  attained  is  probably  as  great  as  the  fundamental 
imperfections  of  his  system  will  admit.  He  at  any  rate  recog- 
nizes the  desirability  of  always  writing  the  same  word  in  the 
same  way,  though  his  manner  of  attaining  that  end  is  defective. 
The  Dictionary  method,  even  if  consistently  followed,  would 
involve  too  much  strain  on  the  memory  to  be  of  general  use. 

2G.  NECESSITY  OF-INSERTING  VOWELS.  In  the  Phonographic 
Reporter*  we  find  this  "  variety  of  forms  with  which  the  same 
cluster  of  consonants  may  be  written",  quoted,  "  among  the 
many  points  of  superiority  which  Phonography  possesses  over 
all  other  systems  ".  It  is  used  "in  providing  different  outlines 
for  such  words"  as  contain  the  same  consonants,  "  so  tha't 
they  may  be  distinguished  at  once  without  the  insertion  of 
then:  vowels  ". 

Now  Pitman's  capricious  variety  of  outline,  in  addition  to 
its  other  disadvantages,  is  quite  inappropriate  to  this  purpose. 
For  in  the  case  of  long  words,  where  the  variety  is  so  great  as 
to  be  absolutely  bewildering,  the  distinction  is  comparatively 
seldom  required ;  and  in  the  case  of  short  words  containing 
one  or  two  consonants,  where  the  distinction  is  most  needed, 
it  most  hopelessly  fails.  To  take  as  an  instance  some  words 
containing  three  consonants :  the  combination  krt  can  be 
written  in  six  different  ways,  three  of  which  are  given  for  the 
word  cart  (see  §  25).  To  take  one  of  them :  the  outline  c- 
(according  to  the  Phonographic  Dictionary)  represents  the 
dissimilar  words  crate,  accord,  curt,  occurred,  acred,  create  etc., 
and  if  thickened,  great,  grade,  agreed,  augured,  etc.,  and  if 
the  dot  for  con  be  omitted,  as  it  often  is,  concrete,  concurred, 
*  p.  17,  edition  1886. 


28  Conditions  of  Legibility. 

concord;  except  in  'Dictionary'  writing  it  might  stand  for 
several  other  words. 

Of  the  remaining  five  ways  of  writing  krt,  one  is  too 
awkward  to  be  of  any  use  ;  the  other  four  are  used  for  other 
words,  such  as  carat,  accurate,  curate,  cart,  curt,  carroty,  etc. 
This  however  is  a  particularly  favourable  case  :  the  variety  of 
five  available  outlines  is  unusual  in  so  short  a  combination  ; 
yet  even  here  it  is  seen  to  be  quite  inadequate :  it  is  much 
more  so  in  the  case  of  shorter  words.  The  cases  where  it  just 
happens  to  fit  the  requirements  of  the  language  are  exceedingly 
few  in  comparison,  and  are  very  poor  "  compensation"  *  for  the 
trouble  and  perplexity  of  choosing  between  the  several  different 
outlines  possible  for  every  long  word. 

It  must  appear  altogether  absurd  that  it  should  be  possible 
to  write  the  consonant  outline  of  the  word  Switzerland  in 
nearly  four  hundred  different  ways ;  the  more  so,  when  we 


reflect  that,  after  all,  the  correct  outline,   ck     sts-tlnt,  may 

still  be  misread  for  as-it-is-your-land,  or  cities -of -Ireland,  or 
as -much-as-Ir eland,  or  such-as-were-lent,  or  something  else, 
according  to  context,  and  clearness  of  writing,  and  virulence 
of  phraseographic  mania. 

The  natural  way  to  distinguish  words  containing  the  same 
consonants,  is  to  write,  or  at  least  to  indicate,  the  vowels. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  we  have  provided  for  the  facile  in- 
sertion of  vowels  by  giving  them  joined  characters  which  are 
written  in  their  proper  order  together  with  the  consonants. 
All  words  differing  in  sound  are  thus  naturally  distinguished 
in  writing.  How  a  word  should  be  written,  or  whether  to 
insert  a  vowel  or  not,  is  not  left  to  the  option  of  the  student ; 
the  correct  outline  in  every  case  is  determined  by  general  rules, 
so  that  no  confusion  of  the  kind  we  have  described  can  arise. 

27.  VOWEL  INDICATION.  Vowel  insertion  alone  is  not  alto- 
gether satisfactory  unless  supplemented  by  vowel  indication ; 
otherwise,  if  any  vowels  are  omitted,  there  is  nothing  to  show 

*  Phonographic  Dictionary,  Preface. 


Conditions  of  Legibility.  29 

where  they  ought  to  come,  and  even  if  all  the  vowels  are 
inserted  there  is  nothing  to  show  that  they  are  all  there. 

It  is  in  reading  long  words  that  a  good  system  of  vowel  in- 
dication, showing  at  a  glance  how  the  consonants  are  grouped, 
is  of  the  greatest  utility.  Indicated  vowels  may  be  very  freely 
omitted  in  long  words  without  risk  of  actual  clashing,  because 
they  seldom  have  precisely  the  same  consonant  skeletons. 
When  the  vowel  sound  itself  is  obscure*,  and  of  no  distinctive 
value  apart  from  its  place  among  the  consonants,  it  is  even 
preferable  to  omit  it,  provided  that  its  place  can  be  indicated. 
Important  vowels  however  should  still  be  inserted  as  an  aid  to 
legibility.  For  instance,  although  a  knowledge  of  the  language 
will  enable  anyone  to  discover  that  d-m-n-sh-n^  can  only 
stand  for  domination,  and  not  for  admonition,  damnation,  or 
dimension;  nevertheless  the  insertion  of  the  principal  vowels 
(thus:  dom-nash-n)  is  a  very  great  help  to  the  instantaneous 
recognition  of  the  word. 

We  have  seen  that  Pitman's  method  of  inserting  vowels  is 
bad ;  in  addition  to  this  his  appliances  for  vowel  indication  are 
very  rudimentary,  and  are  moreover  so  capriciously  employed 
as  to  rob  them  of  nearly  all  their  value.  His  methods  of 
arbitrary  distinction  by  outline  must  not  be  confounded  with 
systematic  vowel  indication. 

To  return  to  our  previous  example ;  compare  the  words, 

e— n  kr-t?--  c~ 1       ^7.  t  r  \creature  \i    k-rtr- 

I  creator  \         "    (courtier  \   carter. 

No  one  can  pretend  that  this  is  systematic  vowel  indica- 
tion. Courtier  is  confused  with  creature,  a  word  of  totally 
different  structure.  The  other  words,  indeed,  are  'provided 
with  different  outlines',  but  this  is  an  instance  particularly 
favourable  to  Mr  Pitman,  because  the  combination  krtr  can  be 
written  in  fifteen  different  ways;  it  contains  two  r's,  each  of 
which  can  be  expressed  in  three  ways,  which  are  theoretically 

*  The  fact  that  more  than  half  the  vowels  in  English  are  of  this  kind 
is  probably  the  origin  of  the  common  superstition  that  all  vowels  can  be 
readily  dispensed  with.  See  p.  63. 

t  It  might  at  first  sight  be  mistaken  for  diminution,  which  however 
contains  a  y  thus  d-m-ny-sh-n. 

c.  3 


30  Conditions  of  Legibility. 

used  for  the  purpose  of  vowel  indication ;  (1)  the  hook  (r),  r 
preceded  by  a  consonant;  (2)  the  character  ~\  (-r),  r  preceded 
by  a  vowel;  (3)  the  character  /  (r-),  r  followed  by  a  vowel. 
Unfortunately  (except  that  the  downward  r,  being  an  awkward 
character,  is  rarely  used  when  a  vowel  follows)  these  rules  are 
so  little  observed  in  practice  that  no  reliance  can  be  placed  on 
them  as  a  means  of  vowel  indication.  (See  also  p.  103.) 

Mr  E.  Pocknell  has  undoubtedly  rendered  great  service  to 
shorthand  by  the  stress  he  has  laid  on  the  importance  of  vowel 
indication :  but  I  think  he  goes  too  far  in  neglecting  vowel  in- 
sertion. It  is  true  that  a  great  many  words  are  readily  recog- 
nized by  their  consonant  skeletons,  especially  if  they  are  not 
spelt  phonetically.  No  one  would  find  much  difficulty  in  re- 
cognizing the  words, 

Gl-dst-n-,  E-nd-lph,  C-lq-h--n,  Br-ght,  sh-rth-nd, 
phl-gm,  t-bl-,  d-bt,  -n--gh,  str-ngth. 

In  the  power  of  distinguishing  monosyllables  and  short 
words  without  the  aid  of  detached  vowel  marks,  by  indicating 
the  number  and  position  of  the  vowels,  his  system  is  certainly 
a  great  improvement  on  Pitman's. 

But  in  many  cases  even  the  indication  of  the  precise  position 
and  number  of  all  the  vowels,  is  not  sufficiently  suggestive,  or 
fails  to  show  the  exact  word.  It  may  take  some  time  to  guess 
words  like  --t-,  -g--,  b---,  -d--,  -b--,  q---.  In  the  case  of 
short  words  there  is  usually  a  choice  of  alternatives,  unless  the 
exact  vowels  are  written. 

To  reporters,  who  from  constant  practice  become  familiar 
with  the  outline  of  every  individual  word,  and  who  can  transcribe 
their  notes  while  the  memory  of  the  subject  is  still  fresh,  a 
certain  amount  of  guess-work  is  not  a  very  serious  drawback. 
But  for  general  use,  especially  for  correspondence  and  notes 
of  lectures  on  technical  subjects,  we  require  much  greater 
certainty*  of  reading,  and  continual  guess-work  is  not  to  be 
tolerated.  The  exact  expression  of  vowel  sounds  is  at  once 
the  most  direct,  simple,  and  complete  method  of  distinguishing 
words,  and.  given  joined  vowel  characters,  this  can  be  effected 
without  serious  expenditure  of  time. 

*  Professor  Everett,  Shorthand,  May,  1884 


Conditions  of  Legibility.  31 

Cursive  Shorthand  has  not  only  provided  very  fully  and 
definitely  for  the  facile  insertion  of  vowels,  where  they  are 
needed  ;  but  has  supplemented  vowel  insertion  with  a  complete 
system  of  vowel  indication,  which  shows  in  every  case  where 
vowels  do  not  occur.  We  are  thus  enabled  to  omit  obscure 
vowels  not  only  without  loss,  but  with  actual  gain  of  legibility. 
By  systematically  inserting  accented  vowels  and  indicating 
unaccented  vowels,  the  outline  is  made  to  show  in  almost 
all  cases  exactly  how  the  word  is  accented  or  divided  into 
syllables*.  The  facility  thus  secured  in  reading  long  and  un- 
familiar words  correctly  at  sight,  is  found  to  be  of  the  greatest 
practical  value. 

28.  POSITIONAL  WHITING.  The  device  of  writing  a  word  in 
'Position'  above,  on,  or  through  the  line,  is  commonly  em- 
ployed in  shorthand  for  indicating  the  nature  of  a  vowel  with- 
out writing  it. 

In  Pitman's  system,  writing  a  word  'in  position'  implies 
that  its  accented  vowel  is  one  of  five  or  six:  this  informa- 
tion is  rather  too  indefinite  to  be  of  much  usef.  Besides  it 
assumes  that  the  rarer  vowels  are  always  inserted.  In  reality 
the  w  and  y  series  of  vowels,  long  and  short,  and  the  dis- 
syllabic diphthongs,  ought  to  be  included.  This  would  raise 
the  total  number  of  vowels  to  nearly  fiftyj,  to  be  divided 
among  three  positions. 

The  use  of  position  for  this  purpose,  besides  being  indefinite, 
is  particularly  objectionable  if  the  accented  vowel  does  not 
happen  to  be  initial,  because  it  is  illogical  to  begin  a  word  out 
of  position  in  order  to  convey  information  about  the  nature  of 
a  vowel  which  may  come  somewhere  near  the  end.  Position, 
if  used,  ought  logically  to  be  restricted  to  the  expression  of 
initial  sounds.  It  is  thus  used  in  Professor  Everett's  system ; 

*  Many  'syllabic'  systems  claim  the  advantage  of  showing,  by  the 
way  a  word  is  written,  how  it  is  divided  or  accented. 

t  Of  so  little  use  that,  except  for  logograms,  it  is  generally  neglected. 

J  Yet  with  all  this  multitude  of  signs,  no  distinction  is  made  between 
the  sounds  of  the  vowels  italicized  in  the  words,  curt  and  cwrry,  hair-oil 
and  hayrick,  boa  and  \x>wie.  Cursive  Shorthand  is  able  to  distinguish 
vowel  sounds  with  much  greater  accuracy  and  completeness,  although 
it  employs  only  about  one-third  of  this  number  of  vowel  characters. 

3—2 


32  Conditions  of  Legibility. 

he  writes  a  word  above  the  line  to  indicate  the  omission  of  an 
initial  circle ;  below  the  line  to  indicate  the  omission  of  initial 
a.  This  is  not  only  perfectly  logical,  but  also  very  simple 
and  useful. 

The  device  itself  however  is  open  to  some  objections,  which 
make  it  in  my  opinion  unsuited  for  general  use.  It  appears 
difficult  and  unnatural  to  the  average  student,  who  generally 
fails  to  master  it  thoroughly.  It  is  not  at  all  a  safe  means  of 
distinction,  unless  ruled  paper  is  used.  Even  then  the  positions 
must  be  strongly  marked  by  putting  the  words  well  above  or 
below  the  line.  This  seriously  violates  the  conditions  of  com- 
pactness and  lineality,  and  may  often  make  it  necessary  to 
shift  the  hand  up  or  down  in  the  middle  of  a  line,  or  to  write 
half  an  outline  in  a  cramped  position.  In  any  case  much 
space  is  wasted,  and  the  writing  acquires  a  straggling  appear- 
ance, so  that  the  lines  are  apt  to  become  confused,  unless 
widely  separated.  It  conflicts  with  phraseography ;  a  word 
cannot  be  distinguished  by  position  when  joined  in  the  middle 
of  a  phrase.  For  these  and  other  reasons  we  have  made  no 
use  of  positional  writing  in  Cursive  Shorthand;  we  are  thus 
enabled  to  dispense  with  ruled  paper,  and  to  secure  the 
maximum  of  compactness,  lineality,  and  phraseographic  power. 

On  the  other  hand  the  device  of  expression  by  'mode', 
that  is  of  writing  characters  in  position  with  respect  to  each 
other,  requires  no  ruled  paper  and  is  perfectly  reliable  and 
distinct.  But  it  should  be  used  in  moderation,  or  it  is  apt  to 
give  rise  to  straggling  and  scratchy  outlines. 

CONDITIONS  OF  BBEVITY. 

29.  The  material  at  our  disposal  being  thus  limited  by  the 
essential  conditions  of  facility,  simplicity,  and  legibility  ;  how 
is  it  to  be  utilized  to  the  best  advantage  in  securing  brevity? 

By  brevity  we  do  not  mean  simply  shortness  of  outline,  but 
rather  speed,  or  shortness  of  time.  The  rate  at  which  an 
outline  can  be  clearly  written,  so  as  to  be  unmistakeable  for 
anything  else,  depends  more  on  its  facility  than  on  its  length. 


Conditions  of  Brevity.  33 

30.  ARBANGEMENT  OP  ALPHABET.     Subject  to  the  condition 
that  '  similar  sounds  should  be  represented  by  similar  signs ',  it 
is  evident  that,  in  arranging  the  alphabet,  brevity  will  he  best 
secured  by  giving  the  quickest  and  easiest  signs  to  the  com- 
monest sounds,  and  the  clearest  and  most  facile  joinings  to  the 
commonest  combinations. 

The  sign  chosen  for  any  sound  should  be  suitable  to  its 
usage,  and  to  the  mode  of  its  occurrence  in  the  language. 
Characters  which  are  facile  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  an  out- 
line, but  join  badly  elsewhere,  should  be  given  to  sounds  which 
occur  generally  as  prefixes  or  as  terminations  respectively. 

It  is  one  great  advantage  of  a  '  phonographic '  as  opposed  to 
an  '  orthographic'  system,  that  any  given  sound,  from  its  very 
nature,  occurs  only  in  a  limited  number  of  combinations. 
Two  vowel  sounds,  for  instance,  rarely  occur  together,  and 
the  number  of  common  combinations  of  consonants  without 
intervening  vowels,  is  very  limited.  It  is  therefore  possible  to 
choose  for  each  sound  a  character  suited  to  its  mode  of 
occurrence.  In  an  '  orthographic '  system,  on  the  other  hand, 
in  so  far  as  it  is  unphonetic,  the  combinations  are  not  governed 
by  any  natural  law :  each  letter  is  liable  to  occur  in  every 
variety  of  way,  and  it  is  more  difficult  to  arrange  the  alphabet 
so  as  to  avoid  awkward  outlines. 

31.  WASTE  OF  MATERIAL.     All  the  available  stenographic 
material  should  be  used  up  as   completely  as  possible.      It 
should  not  be  possible  to  change  any  distinctive  feature  of  an 
outline  without  making  it  mean  something  different.      The 
ability  to  write  the  same  sound  in  many  different  ways  neces- 
sarily implies  proportionate  waste  of  stenographic  material, 
and  a  want  of  definiteness  in  the  meaning  of  the  outlines  and 
in  the  rules  by  which  they  are  formed. 

If  we  grant  that  it  is  possible  in  writing  to  distinguish  two 
sizes  of  character,  a  large  size  and  a  small  size,  strokes  and 
ticks,  as  in  longhand,  we  ought  so  to  arrange  our  alphabet  as  to 
take  the  greatest  possible  advantage  of  the  distinction,  to  use 
it  up  completely.  In  Taylor's  alphabet,  and  in  most  of  the 


34  Conditions  of  Brevity. 

systems  founded  upon  Taylor,  a  double   or  a  triple  length 
character  stands  for  a  character  repeated  two  or  three  times, 

as  in  —  s  (ass),  ss  (assess),  sss  (assizes);  these 

cases  occur  so  rarely  that  the  distinction  of  two  sizes,  though 
it  has  none  the  less  to  be  preserved,  is  practically  wasted. 

In  Cursive  Shorthand  this  wasteful  use  of  the  two  sizes  is 
avoided  by  the  arrangement  of  the  alphabet ;  and  the  distinc- 
tion is  utilized  in  other  ways  so  as  to  make  the  alphabet 
complete.  At  the  same  time  the  sound  represented  by  the  small 
size  character,  is  in  each  case  so  related  to  that  represented  by 
the  large  size,  that  confusion  of  size,  if  it  occurs,  may  be 
attended  with  the  least  possible  harm. 

32.  SOME  'METHODS  OF  ABBKEVIATION'.  We  have  already 
pointed  out  certain  objections  to  the  use  of  symbols.  These 
devices  are  commonly  known  as  'methods  of  abbreviation'. 
To  take  a  favourable  example  from  one  of  Pitman's  pamphlets : 
the  full  alphabetic  form  of  the  word  'misrepresentation'  in 
Phonography,  omitting  all  vou-els,  is  the  first  of  the  following 

cuts: 

^— \ 

msrprzntshn 


If  we  introduce  hooks  for  r  and  shn,  and  put  circles  for  s 
and  z,  it  reduces  to  the  second  form,  which  is  somewhat 
shorter  and  clearer,  thanks  particularly  to  the  circles  which 
replace  the  awkward  s,  z  characters.  This  example  will 
suffice  to  show  how  necessary  these  'methods  of  abbreviation', 
with  all  their  attendant  disadvantages,  are  to  a  purely  geo- 
metric system.  The  necessity  arises  from  the  inadequacy  of 
the  alphabet ;  there  is  no  remedy  for  it,  but  an  entirely  new 
departure. 

Pitman  has  two  special  '  methods  of  abbreviation '. 

(1)  The  addition  of  t  or  d  is  implied  by  halving  the  length 
of  a  character :  (2)  tr  or  dr  or  thr  (in  most  cases)  by  doubling  it. 
Halving  a  stroke  is  a  very  real  source  of  brevity,  especially  as 
the  characters  which  Pitman  assigns  to  t  and  d  are  perpen- 


Conditions  of  Brevity.  35 

dicular  strokes,  thin  and  thick    1 1  ,  which  if  used  to  any  great 
extent,  would  cause  many  of  the  outlines  to  descend  too  far 


below  the  line,  like  attitude 
Given  Pitman's  arrange- 
clioice  but  to  have  some 


>  compare  \  byadtiut  (beatitude). 
ment  of  characters  *,  there  is  no 
other  means  of  expression  for 
these  letters:  the  halving  principle  however  has  many  dis- 
advantages. If  it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  four  different 
lengths  of  character,  it  is  waste  of  material  to  use  two  of  these 
lengths  almost  exclusively  for  the  representation  of  a  single 
pair  of  letters,  and  that  in  such  a  way  as  to  leave  it  generally 
uncertain  which  of  the  two  is  intended. 

^, — -^  may  stand  for  mtr  (matter)   or  mdr  (madder)  or 

mthr  (mother  or  may  there). 
V         for  ppn  (pippin)  or  pnt r  (painter)  or  pndr-t  (ponder) 

a     or  pnthr  (panther). 
/^     rpt  for  rapid  or  wrapt. 

Moreover  in  rapid  writing  these  distinctions  cannot  be 
rigidly  observed;  half  length  strokes  are  written  so  as  to  be 
mistaken  for  ticks  or  full  length  strokes,  and  full  length  strokes 
for  half  length  or  double  length.  The  confusion  produced  in 
this  way,  by  the  accidental  insertion  or  omission  of  countless  t'a 
and  d'a,  is  one  of  the  worst  sources  of  illegibility  in  Pitman's 
system.  It  is  the  natural  consequence  of  such  a  reckless  dis- 
regard of  the  fundamental  principle,  that  similar  sounds  should 
be  represented  by  similar  signs. 

And  yet  we  have  seen  it  stated  that  "the  halving  principle 
is  one  of  the  happiest  devices  in  the  whole  history  of  short- 
hand"!. It  is  true  that  later  in  the  course  of  the  same 
article  the  writer  says  of  Phonography:  "To  be  legible  it 
must  be  written  with  care.  This  necessity  arises  from  its 
brevity;  and  its  use  of  light  and  heavy,  halved  and  double 

*  Compare  the  arrangement  of  Everett's  alphabet,  in  which  hori- 
zontal strokes  are  assigned  to  these  common  sounds. 

t  The  Manual  and  the  Dictionary  are  at  variance  on  this  point, 
as  on  many  others. 

J  Enc.  Brit.  Edition  ix.  Article  '  Shorthand'. 


36  Conditions  of  Brevity. 

length  strokes  ".  An  admission  of  this  kind,  at  the  end  of  an 
article  devoted  to  an  indiscriminate  eulogy  of  Pitman's  system, 
is  very  significant. 

33.  Where  several  of  these  methods  of  abbreviation  happen 
to  conspire,  we  obtain  exceptionally  short  outlines.  "Among 
the  many  points  of  superiority"  (mentioned  above,  p.  27)  which 
Pitman  claims  for  his  system  over  all  others,  we  find  first,  "the 
great  concentration  of  consonant  power  in  the  simplest  mathe- 

q 

matical  forms".  He  instances  outlines  like  (9  strfs  (strives), 
\9  sdrshns  (abbreviation  for  considerations) ;  ^  prnt  (print), 
^  frnt  (front,  friend). 

It  is  a  common  device  in  comparing  two  systems  to  select 
words  of  this  sort,  which  happen  to  have  exceptionally  short 
outlines  in  one  but  not  in  the  other.  Such  outlines  as  the 
above  are  very  attractive  to  the  inexperienced  eye,  and  look 
well  in  advertisements;  but  are  often  so  exceedingly  difficult 
to  write  clearly  that  the  gain  in  brevity  is  more  apparent  than 
real.  As  Mr  Pitman  himself  says  with  reference  to  the  hooked 
and  looped  forms  of  which  beginners  are  so  fond :  "The  briefest 
outline  to  the  eye  is  not  always  the  most  expeditious  to  the 
hand"*;  and  again:  "In  selecting  one  out  of  two  or  more 
possible  forms  for  any  word,  the  student  must  recollect  that 
great  ease  in  writing,  and,  consequently,  the  saving  of  time 
[and,  he  might  have  added,  legibility],  is  not  secured  by  using 
hooked  and  grouped,  and  especially  half-sized,  letters,  on  all 
possible  occasions ;  but  he  must  learn  to  make  a  judicious 
selection.  He  should  choose  a  long,  easy  and  legible  form 
rather  than  a  short  and  cramped  one  "t. 

That  the  elaboration  of  such  highly  concentrated  abbrevia- 
tions is  an  exceedingly  fascinating  and  seductive  mental  re- 
creation, we  do  not  for  a  moment  deny :  but  they  are  too  com- 
plicated to  be  extemporized;  each  combination  must  become 
individually  familiar  before  it  can  be  profitably  used.  As 
Professor  Everett  says:  "There  is  a  certain  pleasure  doubtless 

*  Manual,  p.  46.  §  153.    Ed.  1886. 
t  Id.,  p.  86,  §  129. 


Conditions  of  Brevity.  37 

in  carrying  out  an  elaborate  system  of  rules  for  writing  con- 
cisely, when  we  are  not  hurried,  but  are  able  to  make  all  the 
contractions  at  our  leisure.  But  in  proportion  as  we  lose 
simplicity,  and  depart  further  from  mere  alphabetic  writing, 
the  writer  will  be  liable  to  find  himself  unready  when  instant 
action  is  required".  (See  also  §  20.) 

34.  PHBASEOGBAPHY.     Another  common  method  of  saving 
time  is  to  join  words  together  in  phrases  continuously  without 
lifting  the  pen.    In  a  strictly  phonetic  system  (like  Professor 
Everett's),  where  the  outlines  represent  sounds  rather  than 
words,  this  does  not  make  the  writing  illegible  in  so  far  as 
it  does  not  alter  the  sound.     But  in  a  system  which  is  not 
phonetic,  it  often  happens  that  joining  two  words  together 
makes  the  outline  of  some  different  word.     Phraseography  is 
then  a  great  source  of  illegibility  and  hesitation.    In  such 
systems  word  division  is  just  as  essential  to  legibility  as  in 
ordinary  print.    Even  in  a  purely  phonetic  system  phraseo- 
graphy  should  not  be  too  freely  employed.     The  knowledge 
that  each  separate  outline  stands  for  a  separate  word,  is  of 
great  assistance  in  deciphering  a  sentence  if  badly  written. 
Abbreviated  words  in  any  system  should  not  be  joined  together, 
except  in  very  common  phrases,  such  as  'of  the',  which,  even  if 
they  clash  with  words,  are  so   soon  learnt  that  they  may 
be  used  with  safety.    The  more  common  a  '  phrase '  is,  and  the 
closer  the  connection  of  the  words  it  contains,  the  better. 

Pitman  lays  great  stress  on  phraseography ;  in  fact,  he  says: 
"In  no  other  system  has  this  plan  of  joining  words  together 
been  so  fully  carried  out".  But  since  in  Phonography  all  the 
words  are  abbreviated  by  the  omission  of  their  vowels  and 
otherwise,  words  cannot  be  freely  joined  together  without 
clashing.  Only  known  phrases  can  be  used  safely.  An  un- 
familiar phrase  may  be  quite  illegible.  The  student  has  to 
learn  admissible  phrases  from  a  phrase-book,  just  as  he  has  to 
learn  correct  outlines  from  a  dictionary. 

35.  ABBREVIATION  BY  OMISSION.     The   'method  of  abbre- 
viation' par  excellence  which  is  common  to  all   systems  of 


38  Conditions  of  Brevity. 

shorthand,  is  that  of  omission ;  the  first  step  is  generally  to 
omit  all  the  vowels;  the  next  only  to  write  the  first  two  or 
three  consonants  of  each  word.  The  following  is  an  exact 
transcription  of  one  of  Taylor's  specimens. 

-t  s  b  b  b  rtrs  f  mr  t  n  rdr  t-  kkn  -mn  ndstr  prf  s  s-  kntrfd 
-t  t  r  d-  fd  s  nt  t-  b  prkrd  wt  m  pns  n  Ibr. 

This  is  sufficiently  hard  to  make  out  as  it  stands ;  in  actual 
writing  several  of  the  letters  would  be  uncertain  which  would 
add  considerably  to  the  difficulty. 

A  reporter  who  has  to  transcribe  his  notes  while  the 
subject  is  still  fresh  in  his  memory,  can  put  up  with  a  great 
deal  of  illegibility  and  abbreviation  by  omission :  but  for 
ordinary  purposes  of  correspondence,  and  for  cases  where  the 
original  notes  (untranscribed)  are  required  to  be  read  easily 
at  any  distance  of  time,  perfect  legibility  is  the  most  essential 
point,  and  the  words  should  not  be  too  much  abbreviated. 

The  best  methods  of  abbreviation  are  those  which  are 
familiar  in  longhand.  Indicating  terminations  of  long  words, 
especially  of  words  that  are  often  repeated,  omitting  unim- 
portant connecting  words,  and  similar  methods,  are  very 
largely  used  in  reporting,  and  are  much  preferable,  for  general 
use,  to  the  wholesale  omission  of  vowels,  or  the  use  of  hundreds 
of  arbitrary  abbreviations,  such  as  still  disfigure  systems  of 
shorthand.  It  is  true  that  nothing  can  be  easier  to  read  or  to 
write  than  an  arbitrary  word-sign,  when  once  it  has  become 
perfectly  familiar.  But  such  word-signs,  if  they  happen  not  to 
be  familiar,  are  absolutely  illegible,  and  the  difficulty  of 
learning  them,  except  in  special  cases,  is  so  serious  that  they 
can  only  be  of  general  use  to  professional  writers. 

36.  EEPOBTING.  For  the  purposes  of  Verbatim  Eeporting, 
abbreviation  by  omission  must  be  freely  employed  in  any 
system,  but  facility  and  discretion  in  the  use  of  it  are  only 
to  be  acquired  by  diligent  practice. 

If  the  coveted  art  of  Verbatim  Eeporting  could  be  so  easily 
acquired  as  many  unscrupulous  advertisers  would  have  us 
believe,  it  would  not  be  so  highly  valued.  Its  very  value 


Conditions  of  Brevity.  39 


proves  its  difficulty.  The  following  statement  of  Mr  Edward 
Pocknell,  a  very  well  known  reporter,  will  be  read  with  interest 
by  those  who  wish  to  know  the  real  experiences  of  a  man  of 
undoubted  ability  in  the  modern  school  of  reporting. 

"The  statements  often  published  ever  since  the  art  flou- 
rished about  learning  to  write  100  words  per  minute,  in  any 
system,  in  a  few  weeks,  or  in  two  or  three  months,  with  a 
practice  of  an  hour  a  day,  are  simply  ludicrous  to  those  who 
have  had  any  experience.  The  principles  of  a  good  system 
may  be  acquired  as  fast  as  the  student  pleases  to  read  them; 
but  reducing  them  to  PRACTICE  is  an  essentially  different  thing. 
The  author  [Mr  Edward  Pocknell],  after  two  years'  daily  prac- 
tice of  Lewis's  system,  in  his  early  professional  career,  could 
not  write  100  words  per  minute;  and  on  abandoning  that 
system  for  Phonography,  which  he  also  practised  daily,  some- 
times at  long  spells,  as  a  Reporter  of  Speeches  for  the  Press, 
three  years  passed  before  he  could  write  140  words  per  minute. 
This  statement  is  made  in  the  assurance  that  the  experience 
of  other  practising  writers  has  been  the  same." 

Of  a  certain  system  we  have  seen  it  stated  that  the  report- 
ing style  may  be  acquired  in  twelve  hours;  but  beginners  in 
Cursive  should  not  be  discouraged  if  they  find  that,  though  a 
month's  practice  will  enable  them  to  write  it  with  greater 
facility  than  longhand,  a  much  longer  apprenticeship  is  required 
for  verbatim  work. 

37.  It  is  not  unlikely  however  that,  wherever  verbatim 
accuracy  is  required,  human  agency  will  in  a  few  years  be 
superseded  by  mechanical. 

The  well-known  'Phonograph'  does  verbatim  reporting 
automatically,  and  therefore  not  only  far  more  cheaply  but 
also  more  accurately  than  the  most  skilled  artist.  The  '  Phono- 
graphic' records  have  to  be  transcribed  and  put  into  shape  for 
the  press,  like  any  ordinary  verbatim  reports,  but  it  is  much 
easier  to  transcribe  by  dictation  from  a  '  Phonograph ',  which 
delivers  five  to  ten  words  at  a  time,  than  from  the  best 
shorthand  notes. 


40  Conditions  of  Brevity. 

But  for  the  great  majority  of  private  purposes — such  as 
correspondence,  copying,  and  taking  notes  of  lectures — where 
transcribing  is  out  of  the  question,  and  legibility  is  more 
essential  than  speed,  the  phonograph  will  never  supersede 
shorthand.  In  fact  there  is  every  indication  that  the  popu- 
larity of  the  art  in  the  future  will  increase.  It  seems  to  me 
therefore  that  it  is  a  mistake,  in  constructing  a  system,  to 
attach  so  much  importance  to  brevity  as  to  sacrifice  to  it  any 
considerations  of  legibility  and  simplicity. 

• 

CLAIMS. 

38.  To  recapitulate  briefly  the  argument  of  the  Introduc- 
tion, I  claim  that  Cursive  Shorthand  is  a  good  system,  and 
suitable  for  general  use,  for  the  following  reasons : — 

(1)  Because  it  is  easy  to  write : — 

It  uses  only  two  sizes  of  character.  It  does  not  employ  the 
distinction  of  thick  and  thin  strokes,  or  of  positional  writing, 
so  that  it  can  be  written  equally  well  with  pen,  pencil,  or 
stylograph,  and  on  ruled  or  unruled  paper. 

It  is  very  cursive  and  lineal,  and  similar  to  longhand,  and 
avoids  indistinct  joinings  and  awkward  geometrical  outlines. 

The  vowels  are  written  in  their  natural  order,  by  joined 
characters  like  the  consonants.  Detached  dots  are  rarely 
used,  and  only  for  subsidiary  purposes,  and  need  not  be 
carefully  located. 

(2)  Because  it  is  simple  to  learn : — 

It  is  strictly  'alphabetic',  and  does  not  use  'symbols'  or 
arbitrary  signs. 

It  is  strictly  phonetic,  and  avoids  the  inconsistencies  of  the 
common  orthography. 

The  rules  are  simple,  definite,  and  free  from  exceptions. 

(3)  Because  it  is  easy  to  read : — 

Its  legibility  is  due  partly  to  its  simplicity,  to  the  facility 
and  clearness  of  its  outlines,  and  to  the  scientific  arrangement 
of  the  alphabet ;  partly  to  its  completeness — all  words  differing 


Claims.  4 1 

in  sound  are  naturally  distinguished  in  outline,  and  the  rules 
are  so  definite  that  the  same  sound  cannot  be  correctly  written 
in  more  than  one  way.  Besides  this,  there  is  a  complete 
system  of  vowel  indication,  and  the  outline  is  made  to  show, 
in  nearly  every  case,  how  the  word  is  accented. 

(4)  Because  it  is  as  brief  as  is  compatible  with  the  above 
conditions: — 

The  given  material  is  not  wasted,  but  is  used  up  as  com- 
pletely as  possible,  and  disposed  in  the  most  suitable  manner. 
It  can  be  scribbled  as  recklessly  as  longhand,  and  is  about 
three  times  as  brief  when  fully  written  (see  also  p.  102). 

Cursive  Shorthand,  in  addition  to  the  above  qualifications, 
possesses  great  advantages  for  educational  purposes.  Besides 
being  strictly  phonetic,  it  is  also  very  regular,  systematic,  and 
complete;  thus  it  not  only  improves  the  pronunciation,  but 
affords  a  valuable  mental  training. 

I  do  not  think  that  there  is  any  system  at  present  before 
the  public  which  combines  all  these  qualities  in  so  high  a 
degree  and  in  such  suitable  proportions. 

OEIGIN   OF   CUBSIVE   SHORTHAND. 

39.  The  present  system  was  founded  on  my  reminiscences 
of  an  American  pamphlet,  the  title  and  description  of  which 
(taken  from  Dr  Westby  Gibson's  admirable  Bibliography  of 
Shorthand)  are  as  follows: — A  Brief  History  of  the  Art  of 
Stenography,  with  a  proposed  new  system  of  Phonetic  Short- 
hand, by  William  P.  Upham.  Essex  Institute,  Salem,  Mass. , 
U.S.A.  1877.  [Large  8vo.  Two  plates,  containing  48  alpha- 
bets, from  John  Willis,  1602,  to  Thomas  Towndrow,  1837. 
viii.  and  120  pp.,  including  10  plates.] 

Lest  I  should  appear  in  what  follows  unduly  to  depreciate 
the  value  of  Upham's  work,  I  may  say  at  the  outset,  that 
I  owe  much  more  to  him  than  to  any  other  author,  and  that 
I  found  his  system  so  far  superior  to  Pitman's  for  general 
purposes  that,  although  I  had  spent  some  two  years  in  learning 
the  latter,  I  at  once  abandoned  it  in  favour  of  Upham's  system. 


42  Origin  of  Cursive  ShortJiand. 

The  latter,  like  Cursive  Shorthand,  was  designed  to  supply 
the  need  of  a  system  for  general  use.  It  discarded  the  dis- 
tinction between  thin  and  thick  strokes,  and  the  use  of  detached 
vowel  marks.  Its  alphabet  was  based  on  a  very  complete 
phonetic  analysis,  and  provided  signs  for  all  the  necessary 
sounds.  The  distinction  of  two  sizes  of  character  only,  was 
employed  throughout.  In  all  these  fundamental  points  we 
have  made  no  change.  But  in  one  sense  Upham's  system  was 
incomplete.  Some  of  the  characters  of  his  alphabet  were 
inadequate,  and  gave  rise  to  awkward  combinations  entailing 
special  devices.  Among  the  worst  were  the  following : — 

<   /(,    AW?,    v  y,  •* —  I,  ^ —  r,  *<L  ng, 

V  sh,     Q*i,  -v-  ch,       v^ j ; 
\^   a,    i  (down)  i,    i  (up)  M,     I  (down)  ee,    \   (up)  do,  — |  i. 

The  remaining  characters  of  his  alphabet,  with  a  few  ex- 
ceptions, were  much  the  same  as  in  Cursive  Shorthand,  but 
differently  arranged. 

The  loop  characters  (?  A  were  devoted  to  /,  v,  Ih,  and  the 
large  and  small  circles  to  z  and  s.  The  device  of  expression 
'by  mode'  was  not  used.  The  short  vowels  were  distinguished 
'by  character',  a  method  very  fruitful  in  bad  outlines,  since 
most  of  the  short  vowel  characters  would  not  join  clearly  in 
several  combinations.  The  method  of  vowel  indication  con- 
sisted in  the  use  of  a  large  number  of  special  compound  conso- 
nants; many  of  these  were  objectionable  as  not  containing 
their  respective  primaries ;  thus, 

i_  tr  from  v  t  and  ^ —  r,    3 —  pi  from  r>  p  and  ^ —  7, 

U  nt  from  t  n  and  u   t,     n  mp  from  /  m  and  <^.p, 
J—  kr  from   c  k  and  ^ —  r,    r  ngg  from  -*=^.  ng  and  (  g, 

-^-  kw  from    c   k  and   A  w,  etc. 

There  were  also  many  arbitrary  non-alphabetic  signs  for 
common  words,  prefixes,  terminations,  and  phrases;  the  dis- 


Origin  of  Cursive  Shorthand.  43 

tinctiou  of  three  positions  was  arbitrarily  applied  to  several  of 
these  signs. 

40.  In  laying  the  foundations  of  Cursive  Shorthand  the 
'alphabetic'  principle  (§  20)  was  adopted  as  opposed  to  the 
1  ideographic '.  Arbitrary  compounds  and  arbitrary  word- signs 
were  therefore  rejected  wholesale.  A  great  saving  of  steno- 
graphic material  was  effected  by  giving  the  downward  tick 
/  to  s,  z,  and  using  the  device  of  adding  the  small  circle  to  the 
mutes,  r>  p,  -~>  t,  etc.,  to  form  the  corresponding  sibilants 
n  /,  u>  th,  etc.  The  loop  characters  A',  fr  were  then  assigned 
to  I,  r.  Hooks  were  used  at  first  for  w  and  y. 

The  alphabet  of  Cursive  Shorthand  thus  took  shape  on  the 
first  of  January,  1887.  The  hooks  for  w  and  y  were  soon  found 
to  be  particularly  objectionable,  especially  when  medial,  and  the 
device  of  expression  '  by  mode '  was,  after  various  trials,  applied 
to  these  characters.  This  device  was  found  to  be  so  satisfactory 
that  its  use  was  extended  to  purposes  of  vowel  indication. 

Meanwhile  many  changes  were  made  in  the  vowel  alphabet, 
especially  in  the  expression  of  the  short  vowels.  The  characters 
for  ng,  the  reverse  loops  0  /i  for  I,  r,  the  alternatives  3  ) 
for  t,  d,  were  added  to  the  consonant  alphabet.  The  system  of 
vowel  indication  was  completed  and  simplified  in  such  a  way 
aa  to  render  the  meaning  of  every  outline  more  precise  and 
definite,  and  the  writing  consequently  far  more  legible. 

Awkward  and  indistinct  outlines  were  carefully  hunted  oqj, 
and  eliminated  by  the  application  of  suitable  rules  to  the 
usage  of  the  alternative  characters :  these  rules  were  made 
strict,  instead  of  permissive,  so  that  the  same  sound  could 
not  be  correctly  written  in  several  different  ways. 

The  above  changes  are  more  extensive  and  fundamental 
than  might  appear  at  first  sight:  of  the  characters  of  the 
alphabet  less  than  a  quarter  remain  unchanged  in  meaning 
and  usage;  and  although  Cursive  Shorthand  still  bears  a 
strong  superficial  resemblance  to  its  precursor,  the  change  in 
spirit  and  significance  is  so  great  as  to  entitle  it  to  rank  as 
a  new  system. 


44  Phonetic  Spelling. 


PHONETIC   SPELLING. 

41.  Cursive  Shorthand  is  very  strictly  phonetic:  words  are 
written  as  they  are  spoken  and  not  as  they  are  spelt.     The 
common  spelling  is  so  complicated  and  so  full  of  inconsistencies 
that  it  is  impossible  to  construct  a  simple  and  consistent  system 
of  shorthand  except  on  a  phonetic  basis. 

In  order  to  separate  as  far  as  possible  the  difficulties  which 
are  purely  phonetic  from  those  of  the  shorthand  itself,  we 
employ  a  simple  Phonetic  Notation  (distinguished  throughout 
by  the  use  of  thick,  or  Clarendon,  type)  which  enables  us  to 
make  our  statements  about  sounds  sufficiently  brief  and 
definite,  and  to  represent  very  accurately  the  sounds  which 
the  shorthand  characters  are  intended  to  express. 

It  is  more  fully  explained  and  illustrated  in  a  small 
pamphlet*  on  Phonetic  Spelling,  which  the  student  of  Cursive 
Shorthand  will  find  very  useful. 

42.  The  phonetic  alphabet,  if  we  include  the  letter  x  for 
ks,  contains  30  letters,  namely  the  26  of  the  old  alphabet  and  4 
inverted  letters  A,  o,  s[,  q.     The  letters  3[,  q  are  used  for  the 
two  varieties  of  th  heard  in  thin  j[in,  and  then  qen.  The  letters 
A,  o,  are  used  for  the  vowel  sounds  in  the  words  butter,  toAto ; 
comer,  kAmo. 

The  letters  c,  j,  q,  represent  the  sounds  sh,  zh,  ng;  as  in  the 
words  vicious,  vicos;  vision,  vljon;  singer,  siqo.  The  soft 
sound  of  ch,  as  in  whic/t,  is  the  compound  tc  (tsh).  The  soft 
sound  of  g,  as  in  gentle,  is  the  compound  dj  (dzh).  The  letter 
j,  zhay,  has  the  sound  of  the  French  j,  as  inj'ai.  The  sound 
of  qu,  as  in  queen,  is  kw.  Hard  ch,  as  in  c/taracter,  is  k. 

The  remaining  23  letters  have  their  .usual  meaning. 

The  vowels  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  when  not  followed  by  o,  w,  or  y, 
represent  the  sounds  of  the  accented  short  vowels,  as  in  the 
words  pat,  pet,  pit,  pot,  put. 

*  Phonetic  Spelling,  by  H.  L.  Callendar.    Same  publishers,  price  6d. 


Phonetic  Spelling.  45 

The  letters  o,  w,  y,  are  used  for  the  unaccented  short 
sounds  of  the  vowels  eo  er,  uw  oo,  iy  ee,  respectively. 

The  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  represented  by  '  di- 
graphs '  (double  letters).  Each  digraph  is  formed  by  affixing 
o,  w,  or  y,  to  one  of  the  six  letters  a,  e,  i,  o,  A,  u. 

The  following  are  required  in  English : — 

ao  as  in  there,  fared,  ey  as  in  they,  may.  ow  as  in  how,  now. 

eo     ,,     her,  word.  iy      ,,     we,  see.  AW     „     low,  note. 

oo      „     laud,  lord.  oy     ,,     boy,  oil.  uw     ,,     you,  who. 

AO     ,,     ah,  tars.  Ay     ,,     my,  eye. 

43.  The  Phonetic  Alphabet  should  be  learnt  by  saying  the 
names  of  the  letters  in  the  following  order : — 

Mutes;    p pee,  \)  bee;   t  tee,    d  dee;    ls.kay,ggay: 

Hisses;  f  ef,    v  vee;  j[  eth,  n  thee;  s  ess,  z  zee;  c  shay, 

Trills;      1  el,     rre:  [jzhay: 

Nasals ;  m  em,  n  en,     q  ing : 

Sighs ;     h  he,   w  oo,    y  ee  : 

Vowels;  o  8r;    &  at,     e  et,       iit;       o  ot,     A.  Hit,    M  dot. 

44.  The  Capital,  Script  and  Italic  forms  of  the  new  letters 
are  as  follows : — 

LETTEES.  CAPITALS.  ITALICS.  SCBIPT  FOBMS. 
3i  (thin)               0  H                J    0  -Q-  $ 

H  (then)  A    a  a    8  (79- 

A  (but)  A   A  A    v  "D  xi 

o  (butter)  fi   o  o    9  ol  & 


THE   COMMON  OETHOGEAPHY. 

45.  The  ordinary  spelling  of  a  word  is  frequently  mis- 
leading as  to  its  sound:  we  therefore  append  a  few  practical 
hints  which  will  assist  the  beginner  to  deduce  the  correct 
phonetic  spelling  from  the  common  spelling  in  many  cases. 

c.  4 


46  The.  Common  Orthography. 

(1)  Omit  mute,  or  silent,  letters. 

For  example,  the  italicized  letters  are  not  pronounced,  and 
are  therefore  omitted,  in  the  following  words : 

Mute  e.    believed,  blessed  (blest),  live,  sieve,  late,  league. 

Mute  gli.    though,  right,  caught,  etc. 

Miscellaneous,  damn,  lamb,  phthisic,  ps&lm,  empty,  fcnow, 
knight,  phlegm,  yac/it,  lick,  written,  honour. 

(2)  A  letter  is  often  doubled  in  the  common  spelling  to  in- 
dicate a  short  vowel,  and  a  mute  e  is  often  added  to  indicate 
a  long  vowel.     These  devices  are  not  required  in  phonetic 
spelling  or  in  shorthand,  where  long  and  short  vowels  are 
distinguished  by  other  means.    For  instance,  one  letter  only 
would  be  written  in  each  of  the  following  cases : 

betier,  sinwer,  poppy,  merry  (compare  very,  bury)  seH,  kiss, 
add,  buzz,  irreligious,  immeasurable,  innate,  connect,  BaccTms. 

(3)  In  common  spelling  some  consonants  change  their 
sound  according  to  their  situation.     For  instance  : 

g  is  hard  in  give,  get,  but  stands  for  dj  and  J  in  gentle,  judge. 

c  stands  for  k  as  in  cat,  for  s  as  in  city. 

In  the  phonetic  alphabet  the  letter  c  is  used  only  for  the 
sound  sh  as  in  ocean,  vicious,  chaise,  suspicion,  sufficient. 

ch  stands  for  k  as  in  character,  and  for  to  as  in  church. 

t  stands  for  c  (sh)  as  in  nation,  for  tc  as  in  nature. 

s  stands  for  z  as  in  busy ;  for  c  (sh),  as  in  sugar,  sure;  for 
J  (zh)  as  in  pleasure,  vision. 

ph  stands  for  f  as  in  phonetic,  for  v  as  in  nephew. 

n  stands  for  q  (ng)  as  in  ink,  finger  (compare  singer). 

ng  for  q  in  hanger,  for  qg  in  anger,  for  ndj  in  danger. 

th  has  three  distinct  sounds ;  the  sharp  sound  J[,  in  thin, 
thigh,  wreath;  the  dull  sound  q,  in  then,  thy,  wreathe,  the 
compound  sound  th,  in  pot-hooJc,  short-hand. 

This  list  is  not  intended  to  be  exhaustive  but  contains  most 
of  the  common  variations. 


The  Common  Orthography.  47 

(4)  Words  of  different  meaning,  pronounced  differently,  are 
often  spelled  alike;  such  words  are  distinguibhed  in  phonetic 
spelling.     On  the  other  hand  words  spelled  differently  are  often 
pronounced  alike ;  such  words  are  not  distinguished  in  phonetic 
spelling. 

bow,  bow  (also  bough)  and  bAW. 

live,  liv  (verb),  lAyv  (adj.),  as  in  live-stock. 

use,  yuws  (subst.),  yuwz  (verb)  (also  ewes,  yews). 

lead,  led  and  liyd.     tear,  tyeo  and  tao. 

(5)  A  letter  is  sometimes  sounded  in  pronunciation  which 
is  not  indicated  in  the  common  spelling.     The  commonest  ex- 
ample of  this  is  the  'parasitic  y'  before  the  vowel  u  (you),  as 
in  the  words  beauty,  few,  cure,  suit,  mute,  union,  human;  y  is 
also  commonly  heard  in  words  like  here,  fear,  pier,  peer. 

(6)  The  common  spelling  is  generally  misleading  as  to  the 
vowel  sounds.     The  best  way  to  find  the  phonetic  or  shorthand 
equivalent  for  any  given  vowel,  is  to  think  of  the  key  words,  and 
try  with  which  of  them  the  given  vowel  rhymes.     See  §  48. 

The  letter  r  in  the  common  spelling  when  immediately  fol- 
lowed by  a  consonant,  indicates  one  of  the  o  vowels.  It  is  not 
trilled  and  should  not  be  written  by  the  phonetic  r  (re),  or  its 
equivalent,  the  shorthand  loop  character,  because  the  first 
principle  of  phonetic  spelling  is  to  omit  mute  letters.  The 
corresponding  o  vowel  completely  expresses  the  exact  sound 
without  the  addition  of  the  r:  to  write  the  r  (trill),  when  it  is 
not  pronounced,  is  simply  to  write  the  word  wrongly,  and 
might  often  cause  it  to  be  confused  with  some  different  word. 

CUESIVE   SHORTHAND. 

46.  In  setting  to  work  to  learn  the  shorthand,  the  beginner 
should  start  with  §§  47,  48,  49,  on  the  Alphabetic  Words  and 
Mnemonic  Aids,  and  should  then  read  the  General  Directions, 
§  52,  and  try  to  make  out  the  example  on  p.  88,  with  the  aid 
of  the  Alphabetic  Table,  so  as  to  gain  a  general  idea  of  the 
system  before  attempting  to  master  its  details 

4—2 


48 


SHORTHAND  ALPHABET. 


§46. 


Sound. 

Character.         Eauivalpnts 

Sound. 

Character. 

Examples. 

CONSONANTS. 

SHORT   VOWELS. 

Pf    *b 

o   ^ 

fc.» 

a] 

{pat 

f    u   vjr    1 

ely 

s      \ 

petty 

t,  d 

-s           j- 

t,  d 

I     3    J    ) 

iJ 

pit 

k,g 

c     C 

(  c  chk,  g 
\    hard 

1 

{pot 

A>0 

_ 

butter 

f  ,  V 

n>    r~t- 

/>  r 

( 

3(j  tf 

{  SZ  } 

\         a)        a/         ) 

(A 

J 

put 

LONG  VOWELS. 

tc,  dj 

6      C 

c«,  J  9 
soft 

ao 

^_    ^^          air 

8,  Z 

/   <^j 

s  (c  soft),  z 

eo 

her 

C,  j 

4   </ 

sh,  zh 

00 

^ 

or 

el.ly 

/  ^ 

I 

AO 

r 

are 

ry,  ery 

/    0 

r 

ow 

_y 

how 

em,  my 

J    / 

m 

AW 

/ 

owe 

en,  ny 

/    / 

n 

UW 

j  ^ 

you 

iq,  Iqo 

f     J         V 

ng 

ey 

^~ 

if  ay 

hoo,  hey 

O               ®**^ 

Jioar,  hay 

ty 

^  v 

ire 

woo,wey 

^  K 

wore,  way 

oy 

S 

bay 

yoo,  yey 

v-^ 

yore,  yea 

Ay 

^^ 

I 

SPECIAL  COMPOUND   CHARACTERS. 

O  pt,    $  kt,    Ust,   n  sp,  f.  nt,    fj  nd,  O  kon-,  -con  (-tion). 

Shorthand  Alphabet. 


49 


47.  NOTES  ON  ALPHABETIC  TABLE.     The  student  should 
not  attempt  to  learn  this  table  as  it  stands ;  it  is  only  given 
for  reference,  and  as  exhibiting  a  general  view  of  the  alphabet. 

The  consonants  /  s,  f  J  z,  f  _}  iq  (ing),  are  written 
downwards. 

The  vowels  '  y,  f  AO,  J  uw,  /^  oo,  ^  ow  are  written 
upwards. 

The  first  characters  <-» ,  w;  ^  ,  ^s,  are  generally  used  for 
t,  d;  3[,  t[  (th),  respectively. 

The  sighs,  w  and  y,  are  expressed,  initially  by  hooks  and 
ticks ;  medially,  by  '  mode '  as  explained  in  §§  56 — 58. 

The  short  vowels  a,  e,  and  i ;  o,  A,  and  u,  are  distinguished 
when  necessary,  by  dots  or  'mode'  [§§  77,  (3);  79]. 

The  upward  tick  ^  is  used  for  a,  e,  i,  and  y,  except  when 
disjoined,  and  in  the  cases  denned  on  p.  68,  in  which  the 
downward  tick  gives  a  clearer  outline. 

48.  ALPHABETIC  WOEDS.     Most   of  the  characters,  when 
standing  alone  (when  not  associated  with  other  characters  to 
form  what  are  technically  termed 'outlines'),  are  used  to  repre- 
sent certain  common  words  called  the  'Alphabetic  Words'. 
Each  word  is  chosen  to  suggest,  when  possible,  the  usage  as 
well  as  the  sound  of  the  corresponding  character.     They  are 
very  useful  as  key  words,  and  should  be  thoroughly  learnt. 

For  exercises  thereon,  see  pp.  88,  108. 
VOWELS. 


\  and 

x  of 

-  a,  an 

i  the 


V.  air 
^Ay! 

j  how 


\  way 
^  owe 

—  year  r  are 

/   one  j  you 

The  straight  ticks  \  /  I  when  standing  alone  are  arbitrarily 
used  for  the  words  and,  of,  the,  respectively. 

The  unaccented  short  sound  of  the  word  a,  in  phrases  like 
'such  a  man',  is  identical  with  the  neutral  vowel  o  (er). 

The  character  _  o  is  also  used  for  an. 


50 


Shorthand  Alphabet. 


<^  pea 

ra   for 

Ov  be 

f~*>  have 

^  to 

^  think 

w  do 

\s  them 

•>   at 

3  hath 

)  had 

^)  with 

c   key 

£    which 

C  8ive 

C  Joy 

The  curved  characters  v_  I,  ">  we,  r  are,  J  you  should  be 
made  slightly  longer  than  the  straight  ticks.  They  are  written 
sloping,  and  are  not  so  deeply  curved  as  p,  t,  k. 

The  downstroke  /  standing  alone  is  the  figure  1,  and  is 
used  for  the  word  one.  The  tick  /  s  is  not  used  standing 
alone;  it  would  clash  with  the  vertical  tick  i  the. 

CONSONANTS. 

P  will  )  as,  has 

0  loo  f  is,  his 

$  from  o   who,  self 

0  very  &  selves 

'/    him  U  1st 

/   me  (j   into 

/in  U  hand 

/  no  o  circumstance. 

These  will  be  found  very  useful  in  learning  the  alphabet ; 
they  are  not  merely  convenient  abbreviations. 

Some  of  them  contain  or  imply  preceding  or  following 
vowels.  The  forms  /  me  and  /  in  are  obtained  by  simply 
joining  the  vowel  '  y  (ee)  after  m  and  before  n.  The  character 

//  em  is  only  used  when  a  short  vowel  precedes  m.    The  character 
it  ny,  used  for  the  word  no,  always  implies  a  following  vowel, 

but  not  generally  5 :  at  the  end  of  an  outline  the  vowel  implied 
is  y,  as  in  many. 

Both  the  characters  for  r  require  following  vowels.  The 
character  A  (re)  is  used  when  a  vowel  does  not  precede,  in 
forming  combinations  like  fr,  as  in  from:  the  character 
0  (ery)  implies  a  preceding  vowel,  as  in  the  word  very.  The 
character  Q  (loo),  requires  a  following  vowel:  if  no  vowel  is 
written  the  sound  oo  uw  is  implied  in  certain  cases,  see  §  77  (1). 

The  z  characters  for  is,  as,  being  written  downwards,  cannot 
be  confused  with  are,  you,  when  joined  to  other  characters. 
When  standing  alone,  they  should  be  made  longer  and  steeper, 


Shorthand  Alphabet.  51 

more  like  the  q  (ing)  characters  J  f ,  which  are  not  used  for 
alphabetic  words.  The  words  his,  has,  are  distinguished,  if 
necessary,  from  is,  as,  by  prefixing  a  circle;  thus,  phis,  3  has. 

The  characters  i,  c,  sh,  and  d  j,  zh,  consist  of  small 
circles,  turned  in  opposite  directions  at  the  end  of  an  s  tick. 
The  s  tick  is  generally  omitted  and  the  circles  are  directly 
attached  to  vowel  stems  (§  84).  The  character  J,  when  standing 
alone,  is  used  as  an  abbreviation  for  the  word  such. 

The  small  h  circle,  standing  alone,  is  used  for  the  word 
who,  huw;  as  a  suffix,  for  the  word  self;  as  in  A^O  itself. 

The  double  circle  is  used  to  add  s  to  circle  characters  (see 

§  83) ;  and  for  the  word  selves,  as  in  \f      yourselves. 

The  compound  characters  pt,  kt,  st,  sp,  nt,  nd,  are  only 
used  when  no  vowel  intervenes  between  the  components  in 
each  case.  It  would  be  a  bad  mistake  to  write  u  Bt  for  city, 
or  S  kt  for  cat.  There  are  a  few  other  compound  consonants 
of  less  importance,  formed  in  a  similar  way  by  combining  their 
components.  (§§  80—89.) 

By  enlarging  the  circle  of  c,  J  to  add  the  syllable  on,  we 
obtain  useful  forms  for  the  common  terminations  -t ion,  -sion :  as 
/CQ  ind-keycon,  indication;  "^-  okeyjon,  occasion.  (§  85.) 

Initially  the  large  circle  is  used  for  the  prefix  kon,  con,  as 
in  CM-  kontro,  contra;  ay  konsistent,  consistent.  (§  82.) 

When  disjoined  it  is  used  for  the  prefix  circum;  and  when 
standing  alone,  for  the  word  circumstance. 

49.  MNEMONIC  AIDS.  The  characters  of  the  alphabet  are 
best  learnt  by  actual  practice  in  reading  and  writing,  by  the 
constant  use  of  the  alphabetic  words,  and  especially  by  noting 
the  relations  between  the  characters  and  the  sounds  they  re- 
present (§§  50,  51).  But  the  beginner  unacquainted  with 
phonetics  will  probably  find  the  following  mnemonic  associ- 
ations most  useful  at  the  outset. 

The  character  c  for  k  (hard  c,  as  in  cat)  is  simply  the 
letter  c  without  the  dot. 


52  Shorthand  Alphabet. 

The  character  r\  for  p,  and  the  related  characters  for 
b,  £,  T,  curve  vp : —  p,  up. 

The  character  v_y  for  d,  and  the  related  characters  for 
t,  n,  it,  curve  down : —  d,  down.  - 

The  characters  /  „  for  m,  n,  are  portions  of  the  letters 
M,  N.  f 

The  character  JL  Iqa  (inger)  for  the  'back -nasal',  is  the 
character  y  n,  written  backwards,  with  the  o-tick  (_)  added. 

The  loop  characters   •*    r  for  1  and  r,  may  be  associated 

"        D 
with  the  longhand  script  forms  xC    f. 

The  character  <j  th,  is  formed  from  the  character  u  t  by 
adding  a  small  circle  at  the  end,  just  as  in  the  ordinary 
spelling  the  letter  h  is  added  to  t  giving  the  digraph  th. 
Similarly  the  other  circle  characters  may  be  associated  with 
the  ordinary  spelling,  in  which  their  sounds  are  often  re- 
presented by  the  digraphs  ph,  ch,  sh,  etc.,  if  we  regard  the 
modifying  circle  as  corresponding  to  the  letter  h.  Thus : — 

ph,  a,  f;    eh,  C  ,  tc;    $h,    4  ,  c;    nth,  ^,  ruj;    sth,  (3  ,  s*. 

RELATIONS  BETWEEN  SOUND  AND  SIGN. 

50.  The  forms  of  the  characters  are  chosen  so  that  similar 
sounds  may  be  represented  by  similar  signs. 

DISTINCTIOSS  OF  SIZE.  The  first  sixteen  consonants  are 
arranged  in  natural  pairs;  pi),  td.  kg,  fv.  30;,  tcdj.  s  z, 
c  J.  The  members  of  each  pair  are  very  closely  related  in 
sound.  In  technical  language  the  first  member  is  said  to  be 
'breathed',  and  the  second  'voiced'.  The  corresponding  dif- 
ference in  the  characters  (except  s  z,  c  j)  is  one  of  size. 

The  small  size  characters  ^  p,  •-'  '  t,  c  k,  ">  £,  w  a  j, 
6  tc,  belonging  to  the  '  breathed '  or  '  whispered '  articulations, 
are  made  a  little  less  than  half  the  size  of  the  corresponding 
•full',  or  'voiced',  sounds  /~\b,w)  d,  (_  g,  (~t  v,  v-^O  n, 
C  dj.  In  the  case  of  s  z,  c  j,  it  is  more  convenient  to  make 
the  distinction  in  other  ways.  The  tick  for  a  is  straight,  for  z 


Relations  between  Sound  and  Sign. 


53 


curved;  and  the  circles  for  c  and  j  are  turned  respectively, 
6  O  c  backwards,  and  d  O  j  forwards  (clock-wise).  (§  55.) 

The  breathed  varieties  of  1,  r,  m,  n,  w,  y,  are  practically 
non-occurrent  in  English,  and  of  little  importance. 

The  short  vowels  are  expressed  by  ticks ;  the  long  vowels, 
by  curves  and  strokes. 

51.  DISTINCTIONS  op  DIRECTION.  Each  consonant  character 
involves  a  down-stroke  or  a  back-stroke  which  can  be  thickened : 

each  vowel  character  an  up-stroke ,--''  or  a  cross-stroke  \ 

with  a  motion  of  traverse  along  the  line. 

The  sloping  vowels  should  not  be  written  steeply,  but  at  an 
angle  of  30°  to  the  line:  thus,  .^T  30°.  The  vowel  curves 
should  be  slightly  curved  and  sloping  ;  for  instance,  oo  should 
be  written  /- —  NOT  s~^~  which  would  be  confused  with  To. 

The  directions  assigned  to  the  characters  depend  on  the 
organs  by  which  they  are  produced. 

The  general  relations  are  exhibited  in  the  annexed  table*: 


Organ* 

Names 

Directions 

Characters 

Lips 

Labial 

Upwards 

n  p,  n>  f,  /  m 

Teeth  and 
Gums 

Front  or 
Dental 

Downwards 

o  D  t,   I/  n,  /  s 

Back           i  Back  or 
palate       '.     Guttural 

Backwards 

c  k,   (  g,  C  q 

Similar  relations  hold  of  the  vowel  characters. 

Labial,  or  w-vowels,  upwards;  ^  AW, s  ow,  _^.  uw. 

Front,  or  y- vowels,  downwards ;    \  ey,  ~"N  Ay,  ~v"  iy. 
Neutral,  or  o-vowels,  end  horizontally; eo,  /^~oo,  V_  ao. 


This  classification  is  necessarily  rough. 


54  General  Directions  for  Writing. 


GENEEAL  DIEECTIONS  FOE  WEITING. 

52.  WRITING  MATEKIALS.    The  prettiest  and  most  accurate 
results  are  obtained  with  pen  and  ink  on  ruled  paper ;  but  for 
all  practical  purposes  Cursive  Shorthand  may  be  equally  well 
written  on  plain  paper  with  a  pencil  or  stylograph. 

IN  LEABNING  TO  WKITE,  it  is  important  as  far  as  pos- 
sible to  avoid  writing  words  incorrectly;  at  first  therefore 
the  student  should  never  hurry,  but  should  draw  every 
character  carefully  and  deliberately,  so  as  to  avoid  forming 
bad  habits.  Speed  will  come  by  practice.  In  taking  notes  the 
student  should  on  all  possible  occasions  use  those  words, 
especially  'alphabetic  words,'  with  the  correct  outlines  of  which 
he  is  already  familiar :  important  and  unfamiliar  words  should 
at  first  be  always  written  in  longhand;  if  written  hurriedly, 
before  a  good  style  has  been  acquired,  they  will  probably  be 
written  incorrectly,  and  may  be  difficult  to  read  afterwards. 

IN  LEAKNING  TO  EEAD,  the  student  should  particularly  avoid 
spelling  words  out  by  the  ordinary  names  of  the  longhand 
letters,  which  are  often  no  guide  to  the  sound.  Ultimately 
a  habit  is  acquired  of  recognizing  words  by  their  outlines 
without  spelling  them  out,  or  even  pronouncing  them ;  in  the 
meantime,  if  a  word  must  be  spelt  out,  it  is  best  to  write  down 
the  equivalent  of  the  shorthand  outline  in  phonetic  notation, 
and  then  try  to  pronounce  it,  putting  in  the  vowel  e  in  place  of 
'indicated'  vowels.  (§  67.) 

53.  In  writing,  the  characters  representing  the  sounds  of  a 
word  are  all  joined  together  in  their  proper  order,  forming 
a  continuous  whole,  technically  called  an  '  outline '.     The  pen 
is  not  lifted  from  the  paper  except  as  required  by  the  '  Mode  of 
Hiatus'  (see§  74). 

The  relative  sizes  of  large  and  small  characters  must  be 
carefully  maintained,  just  as  in  longhand.  The  actual  size  of 
the  characters  may  be  varied  according  to  circumstances,  such 


General  Directions  for  Writing.  55 

as  the  goodness  of  the  light  and  the  writing  materials.  The 
minuteness  of  any  kind  of  writing  is  limited  by  the  size  of  the 
smallest  characters.  Since  in  Cursive  Shorthand  the  small 
size  may  be  made  as  small  as  you  like,  and  the  small  circle 
may  be  reduced  to  a  dot,  the  writing  may  be  made  very  compact 
indeed.  This  is  often  convenient  in  marginal  notes  and  like 
cases  (§  107) .  The  beginner  should  not  attempt  this  at  first.  The 
best  general  rule  is  to  make  the  small  characters  <•»  ^  c  J  - 
as  small  as  they  can  conveniently  be  made — say  from  ^th  to 
^Vh  of  an  inch  long,  as  in  ordinary  longhand  writing — and 
the  large  size  /^  w  £  J  —  at  least  twice  as  big.  The  tick 
/  s  should  be  kept  as  short  as  possible,  not  more  than  one-third 
of  the  length  of  /  n. 

The  way  in  which  the  characters  are  joined,  in  almost  every 
conceivable  combination,  is  very  fully  illustrated  in  the  suc- 
ceeding pages.  The  student  is  advised  to  write  down  every 
illustration  as  he  comes  to  it,  and  to  compare  the  phonetic 
key  with  the  outline,  and  with  his  own  pronunciation,  in  each 
case,  so  as  to  learn  to  distinguish  accurately  the  sound  belong- 
ing to  each  character. 

Wherever  alternative  characters  are  given  for  any  sound,  it 
is  not  optional  to  use  either  in  any  given  combination.  Which 
of  two  alternative  characters  is  to  be  used,  is  determined  either 
by  rules  of  vowel  indication  or  by  considerations  of  clearness 
and  facility. 

The  simplicity  and  phonetic  strictness  of  Cursive  Shorthand 
alone  render  it  possible  to  provide  a  complete  set  of  rules  to 
meet  all  cases.  This  not  only  saves  the  student  the  trouble 
and  perplexity  of  choosing  for  himself  which  of  two  characters 
is  preferable,  but  also  secures  uniformity  of  style  among  writers 
of  the  system. 

Great  pains  have  been  taken  in  illustrating  the  rules  to 
choose  the  most  suggestive  examples.  In  addition  to  this 
a  series  of  progressive  exercises  has  been  appended,  which  are 
arranged  in  such  a  way  as  to  show  what  characters  are  to 
be  used  in  each  case. 


56  General  Directions  for    Writiny. 

54.  ANGLES  OF  JOINING.  In  joining  two  characters,  if  the 
second  begins  in  the  same  direction  as  the  first  ends,  the 
joining  is  not  marked  by  an  angle  or  break  but  is  said  to  be 
'continuous';  as  in  c —  keo,  cur,  from  c  k  and  —  eo. 
Similarly  (^^  kAWt,  coat;  <^  Tiow,  cow;  r*j  p-t;  <;  -kt. 

In  many  cases,  where  a  very  blunt  angle  (greater  than  135°) 
would  naturally  occur,  if  the  exact  geometrical  forms  of  the 
characters  were  followed,  no  angle  need  be  made  in  actual 
writing,  provided  that  the  component  characters  are  clearly 

distinguishable,  as  in    .W,  gr-t,  great,  from  C, 

This  does  not  apply  to  blunt  angles  between  straight  strokes 
as  in  the  case  of  coercion  and  oasis  (§  63). 

The  angle  need  not  be  marked  in  the  combinations 
\^,eyd,  aid;  ^~\bey,  bay;  ^^>  eyt,  eight;  r\  pey,  pay ; 
but  should  be  marked  after   ^  and  w  and  before  n   and  ^ 
as  in  \j^  tAW,  toe;  ^^  Awf,  oaf;  ^\j^ potato. 

Blunt  angles  of  120°  or  less  should  generally  be  marked, 
but  may  be  slurred  or  rounded  off,  as  in  the  annexed  cuts. 

^^^    dowt,  doubt;      v,kao,  care;    ^^"^  oodo,  order. 

Angles  less  than  a  right  angle  are  generally  sharpened : 

x— -V,  diyp,  deep;  NOT  ^-^v;     tf  suwn,  soon;  NOT  u . 

Sharp  angle  joinings  are  the  clearest.  The  alternative  cha- 
racters are  used  so  as  to  secure  sharp  angle  joinings  wherever 
possible.  Continuous  joinings  are  speedy  but  not  always  clear. 
Outlines  such  as  ^_^N^  d-beyt,  debate,  involving  continuous 
joinings,  are  wanting  in  sharpness,  and  if  written  fast  are 
difficult  to  write  neatly.  They  occur  very  rarely  in  Cursive 
Shorthand. 

When  a  character  ending  in  a  circle  is  joined  to  a  following 
character,  the  circle  is  described  by  a  continuous  movement  of 
the  pen,  ending  in  the  direction  in  which  the  second  character 
begins  so  that  there  is  no  break  or  angle ;  compare  the  words : 
vji  qey,  they;  v~\  dey,  day:  <^~  foo,  fore,;  <V  poo,  pore; 
f>  tcao,  chair;  c  kao,  care:  \ju  q-t,  that;  \~s~>  d-t,  dot. 


General  Directions  for    Writing. 


In  a  few  cases,  those  in  which  the  circle  ends  in  the  oppo- 
site direction  to  the  beginning  of  the  next  character,  a  sharp 
angle  is  made  after  the  circle,  as  in 

j^   gr-f-k,  graphic;    V   senco,  censure. 

INITIAL   H,  C  (SH),  W,  Y. 

55.  H,  c.     The  small  circle  used  for  initial  h,  is  turned 

forwards  \jf )  m  tne  same  direction  as  that  in  which  the 
hands  of  a  clock  move.  The  small  circle  used  for  initial  c  (sh), 
is  always  turned  backwards  \J<,  counter-clockwise,  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  longhand  letter  c  or  o.  The  sound  j  (zh) 
does  not  occur  initially  in  English  (see  §  84). 

£~^  head,   <\f    hell,      crv  hut,      <*\  he,       ctf  hen, 

o*-^  shed,     vr    shell,     Q-u  shut,     s  she,     <y]  shin, 

o\      hare,       a — u   hurt,     <$"      hoar,       6t    hark, 

^ share,     Q — u  shirt,     & —  shore,     cxT  shark, 

0-^"  hoe,        o-^     hoot,     °\   hay,       °^\  high, 
o--'  shoio,     o^     sJwot,     ^    shay,      ^.   shy. 

The  vowels  are  omitted  in  the  words  of  shall,  Q_/  should. 

In  practice,  the  word  she  may  be  written  straight ;  thus,  3. . 
It  need  not  be  curved  unless  joined  to  following  characters. 

Initial  h  is  omitted  in  the  words  how,  house  ;  and  the  circle 
is  turned  backwards  in  the  word  his  (p.  51). 

Medial  h  is  rare ;  the  forward  circle  generally  joins  badly 
between  two  characters.  The  h  circle  may  never  be  joined 
after  consonants;  and  may  never  be  turned  backwards.  It 
may  be  joined  after  vowels  if  it  falls  naturally  outside  an 
angle ;  as  in 
-p~s  ahead,  -^  ahoy;  compare  -Cr  ashore,  \/  as hame. 

56.  w.     A  forward  hook  is   used  for  initial    w,   before 
forward  curves;  as  in  w~b  weave,  <r"C  wook,  walk:  and  in  the 
following  common  words,  from  which  the  vowels  are  omitted; 

9  what,    )  would,    0  when,    9  went,    n  whence. 


58  Initial  ff,  C  (SH),   IF,    Y. 

An  upward  or  up-backward  tick  is  used  for  initial  w  in 
other  cases ;  as  in 

<u  wet,   -*\_s  wood,    ri  won,    4  win,    v°  woe,  wash; 

fjf  well,    ^r    wool,    \.  why,   \^  were,   'X,  way, 
v^  word,   e>>^^  wiyod,  weird,    <-""  woe,    </^-'  u-oo'd. 
The  wmaygenerally  beomitted,  or  expressed  by  '  mode '  (§  58), 
in  the  words,   T  was,  /^_9-  whether;  also  in  were ,  way,  icon't. 

57.  Y.     The  downward  tick  \  is  used  for  initial  y ;  as  in 
\^  yet,  V  yes,    Jr    yell,    y  yap,    ^  yot,  yacht; 

\ year,  \f^^  yard,  V  young,  **l  yawn,  'St/  yeast. 

It  is  joined  by  an  upward  tick  before  a  downward  vowel; 
as  in  the  words  v\  yea,  ^\^  yare. 

Initial  y  is  omitted  before  the  vowel  j  uw,  oo,  as  in 
^/  yuws,  use  (subst.) ;  j  yuwz,  use  (verb) ;  initial  ob,  without 
the  y,  occurs  only  in  the  word  ooze,  which  is  written  as  in  §  62. 

If  great  precision  is  required,  the  y  tick  is  used,  followed  by 

the  y-mode;  thus,  V9  yuw%,  youth;  \ff?  yuwl,  yule. 

The  y  in  year  may  be  omitted,  or  expressed  by  'mode '  (§  58). 

Vowels  following  h,  w,  and  y,  are  always  written  like  initial 
vowels  (§  69,  Exercise  V.),  except  that  the  short  vowels  a,  e,  i, 
are  written  /  upwards  after  \  y.  After  w  and  h,  they  are 
written  \  downwards  before  upstrokes  and  backstrokes,  or  if 
not  joined  to  a  following  character. 

The  ticks  are  used  for  initial  w  and  y,  only  before  vowel 
characters. 

58.  MEDIALLY  w  and  y  are  expressed  by  '  MODE  OF  HIATUS', 
that  is  to  say,  by  lifting  the  pen,  leaving  a  small  interval  or 
'hiatus',  and  starting  afresh,  above  for  w,  below  for  y. 

Thus  in  the  outline  C\  kwey,  qua;  the  w  is  expressed 
by  beginning  the  \  ey  a  little  above  the  end  of  the  c  k. 

Similarly  in   °J  hyuw,  hue;  /^^° adhyeo,  adhere;  the  y 

is  expressed  by  beginning  the  vowel  below  the  h  circle. 


Initial  H,  C  (SH),   W,   Y.  59 

The  sound  hw,  wh,  the  '  breathed '  w,  is  similarly  expressed 
by  using  the  w-mode  after  the  b  circle ;  thus, 

=>V_  fcwao,  where ;  oNs  hwey,  whey. 

But  the  distinction  between  w  and  w/t  is  not  generally  main- 
tained in  English  speech ;  it  is  therefore  sufficient,  except  when 
it  is  desired  to  imitate  a  peculiarity  of  pronunciation,  to  write 
w  in  all  cases  for  wh. 

The  y-mode  is  most  commonly  required  before  the  vowel 
ft  yuw  (you),  as  in  the  words 

s~^i^  byuwty,  beauty;  r\J  pya.w,pew;  i/syvLW,sue. 

The  w-mode  is  chiefly  required  after  k,  t  to  express  the 
combinations  kw  (qu),  tw,  thus: 

Cv  kwio,  queer;    ~vtS  iykw-1,  equal;    ^M  akwyes,  acquiesce. 
wS   tWAyn,  twine;  \^r  dwel,  dwell;   /^~~  swao,  swear. 

It  may  be  observed  that,  in  the  w  and  y  modes,  the  charac- 
ters are  written  in  position  as  though  the  ticks  were  inserted: 
thus,  -\  owcy,  away ;  - oyeo,  a  year. 

They  should  be  made  to  overlap  each  other  slightly,  when 
possible,  to  show  their  connection  more  clearly. 

The  ticks  are  good  initial  characters,  but  if  used  medially 
would  often  present  awkward  joinings:  in  rapid  writing  the 
modes  generally  give  clearer  outlines. 

Initial  hooks  can  only  be  used  safely  in  the  special  case 
selected,  namely  the  forward  hook  before  forward  curves. 
Other  hooks,  such  as  <^,  <\,  c^/,  though  they  can  be  easily 
distinguished  in  a  cut  from  (^  co,  f\  pay,  <^/  cow,  would 
cause  serious  clashing  in  actual  practice. 


LONG  VOWELS. 

59.  By  the  terms  'Long  vowels'  and  ' Short  vowels'  are  to 
be  understood  the  sounds  given  hi  the  Alphabetic  Table  under 
those  headings. 

Long  vowels  are  expressed  in  almost  all  cases  by  writing 
then-  characters  in  their  proper  sequence. 


60  Long   Vowels. 

The  vowels  r  AO,  —  eo,  ^  AW,  ^x  ey,  /^  oo,  ^'  ow,  ^  oy 

generally  present  good  joinings,  and  require  no  alternative 
characters.     (See  Exercises  II.,  III.,  p.  108.) 

The  characters  V.  ao,  *-  ~\  Ay,  ~N  ~v  iy,  ./-*».  uw  are 
likely  to  give  the  student  most  trouble  at  first.  They  involve 
curves  on  the  awkward  slope  \  ,  which  sometimes  present  bad 
joinings,  and  therefore  require  alternatives.  (Exercise  IV.) 

60.  The  character  \-  ao  joins  well  after  upstrokes,  -/^ 
and  back-circle  characters  : 

/'^_  nao,  ne'er;  ^\      pao,  pair;  J(^_  lao,  lair. 

After  the  downstrokes,  s,  m,  sp,  and  after  forward  circles, 
such  as  f,  h,  the  character  ~V  is  used,  as  in 

fl.      spao,  spare;     I      mao,mare;     «\     fas,  fair. 

61.  AY.     The  character    v_   I  is  generally  used  for  the 
sound  Ay,  as  in  the  following  words  : 

>^  r-lAy,  rely;     ^v.  &-UA.J,  deny  ;      Q    like;     ^-^  dine. 

/-\   bAy,  by;    ^  Ays,  ice;    V.  Ayz,  eyes;    ^-  Ayiq,  eyeing. 
It  is  straightened  to  \  after  a  downstroke,  or  forward-circle. 
/    SA.yn,sign;     /.  mAy,  my;      ^  f*.J,fie.     (§  73,  end.) 

The  character  v  is  lengthened  to  V,  ,  and  s  to  "^  before 
an  upstroke. 

^~,ty.Pe;     uy^ripe;      Vs-Z're;     ^/)  mile. 

After  *-  \  Ay,  and  V.  ao,  the  consonants  t,  d,  21,  TI.  are 
written  3  )  s  ^)  respectively  (Exercise  IX.)  ;  after  all  other 
vowels  the  characters  v  \^  <&  ^_y  are  used.  (§  81.) 

jLAynp,  either;    ^  WAyt,  white;      }I'd;  aod,  air'd. 


The  character  ~~N  is  used  after  circle  h,  but  is  shortened  to 
\  before  a  consonant  downstroke  ;  thus, 

^  high,   /  Hine,  °^  height,     )  hide. 


Long   Vowels.  61 

62.  uw,  IY.     The  full  forms  -v- ,   _>^_   are  written  before 
backstrokes   c   k,    C  S>    r  %,  f  QL- 

°vc  wiyk,  week;    -\r  iyz,  ease;    '-v?  siyiq,  seeing. 

-A     yuwko,  Euchre;     -^     uwz,  ooze;    ^  hyuwdj,  huge. 
The  second  stroke  of  ->-  uw  is  always  omitted  in  other  cases. 
^/^  suwp,  soup;     v^_/->   dyuwp,  dupe;   (_^  kuwl,  coot. 
w  j[ruw,  through ;   _^Jl\  yuwt-1-ty,  utility ;    <^/  fyuw,  few. 

The  second  stroke  of  ~v~  iy  is  reduced  to  the  tick  /  before 
downstrokes,  and  is  omitted  before  upstrokes. 

i^,  siyt,  seat;    ^y  siyn,  seen;  L,    siyst,  ceased. 
C^  Myp,  keep;    G^  tciyf,  chief. 

The  vowels,  uw  after  -r  0  ,  and  iy  after  A  Q  t ,  are  not 
written,  but  expressed  by  'Mode  of  Hiatus'.  (§  77.) 

The  sounds  -J~  uo,  ^v_  io,  as  in  ^>oor,  peer,  are  better  re- 
placed, except  in  words  like  wooer,  seer  [§  77  (2)],  by  the  ap- 
proximate sounds  ^~~  oo,  —  yeo,  which  are  more  easily 
written  and  give  clearer  outlines :  as  <T>  fyeo,  fear. 

The  word  your,  in  particular,  should  be  written  \^~  yoo,  not 
-s-  yuwo  (ewer),  to  distinguish  it  safely  from  _^~  owo,  our. 

63.  Two  LONG  VOWELS  IN  SUCCESSION.     Two  long  vowels 
rarely  follow  one  another  without  an  intervening  consonant. 
The  following  are  a  few  examples  (see  also  Exercise  XXV.): 

0~x 

V       hAyeytos,  hiatus;          -^"^  Aweysys,  Oasis. 

ju  O 

v^/-^    3[ruwowt,  throughout;    r/        kAweocon,  coercion. 
0 

\^T-.  lyAwlyon,  Aeolian;         ^/*s~   AyAWto,  Iota. 

For  cases  where  one  or  both  of  two  vowels  in  succession 
are  short,  see  §§  75,  77,  Mode  of  Hiatus. 

64.  The  characters  0    +  are  not  used  for  1  and  r  respect- 
ively, after  vowel  characters.     (§  86.) 

c.  5 


62  Long   Vowels. 

The  upstroke  of  the  character  t  em  represents  a  short 
vowel  (§  87).  It  is  omitted  after  long  vowel  characters.  The 
downstroke  /  is  not  joined,  but  is  written  in  position  as 
though  the  upstroke  had  been  described.  Compare  the  words  : 


home,  r^^  poem;      ^-w  time,      \/  lam; 

/y  meum,  y  seem;     if  suum,    x//  assume. 

65.  LONG  VOWELS  ABE  BARELY  OMITTED.  Long  vowels, 
especially  when  accented,  are  the  most  audible  of  sounds, 
and  are  the  most  important  in  distinguishing  words  .in 
speech.  In  shorthand,  long  vowels  may  only  be  omitted  in 
very  common  words  and  terminations,  such  as  are  sufficiently 
distinguished  by  their  consonants,  and  cannot  clash  with  the 
full  outlines  of  other  words  and  phrases,  so  that  the  gain  of 
brevity  is  attended  with  little  loss  of  legibility. 

In  abbreviating  words,  it  is  generally  better  to  omit  one  or 
two  final  consonants,  and  to  keep  the  accented  long  vowels. 
The  latter  remain  audible  in  speech  long  after  the  consonants, 
so  that,  if  we  retain  them,  the  habits  of  interpretation  which 
have  been  already  acquired  in  listening  to  spoken  discourse,  will 
then  avail  us  in  reading  abbreviated  shorthand. 

The  vowel  ey  may  be  much  more  frequently  omitted  than 
any  of  the  other  long  vowels.  The  gain  thus  secured  in 
sharpness  and  compactness  of  outline,  by  the  omission  of  the 
awkward  slope,  is  often  great;  and  the  loss  of  legibility  is 
relatively  small,  because  ey  is  a  very  common  vowel  and 
closely  related  in  sound  to  e  (§  73). 

The  common  termination  -ate  is  generally  long  in  verbs; 
but  is  so  common  that  the  vowel  may  always  be  omitted  in 
words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  provided  that  its  place  is 
indicated  and  that  a  clearer  outline  is  secured  by  its  omission  ; 
as  in  the  words, 
b(  __  *j  accommodate,  Q^  agitate,  mt^-1  fascinate,  _o<_/  operate. 

The  outlines  of  all  the  common  words  from  which  vowels 
may  be  omitted  are  given  in  the  list  on  pp.  106,  107  ;  and  are 
collected  for  reference  in  Exercise  XX. 


Short   Vowels.  63 


SHORT   VOWELS. 

66.  It  is  a  marked  peculiarity  of  the  English  accent  that 
some  syllables  are  strongly  emphasized  or  accented,  and  others 
slurred  or  pronounced  with  very  little  force.     The  sounds  of 
the  accented  syllables  are  most  clearly  given  in  pronunciation, 
and   are   most   important  in   distinguishing  words.     A  short 
vowel  in  an  unaccented  syllable  tends  to  lose  its  distinctive 
features,  and  to  pass  into  a  neutral  voice  murmur. 

More  than  half  the  vowels  in  English  are  short  and  un- 
accented. The  function  of  such  a  vowel  is  chiefly  to  mark 
the  arrangement  of  the  consonants.  In  speech  words  are  dis- 
tinguished not  by  the  sounds,  but  rather  by  the  places  of  their 
unaccented  short  vowels.  If  therefore  the  place  of  such  a  vowel 
among  the  consonants  be  indicated,  it  is  fully  and  adequately 
expressed,  and  need  not  be  written  by  character. 

This  method  of  treating  the  unaccented  vowels,  enables  us 
to  mark  the  way  in  which  a  word  is  accented,  and  is  one  of 
the  chief  features  of  the  present  system.  The  beginner  will 
perhaps  fail  at  first  to  appreciate  its  full  importance.  He  may 
find  some  difficulty  in  the  distinction  between  accented  and 
unaccented  vowels,  because,  although  it  is  one  of  the  most 
essential  distinctions  in  speech,  it  is  not  recognized  in  the 
common  spelling.  For  a  fuller  explanation  of  the  difference, 
he  is  referred  to  the  pamphlet  on  Phonetic  Spelling  before- 
mentioned  (p.  20),  in  which  the  subject  of  the  expression  of 
accent  is  discussed  and  illustrated  in  considerable  detail. 

67.  VOWEL  INDICATION.    A  short  vowel  is  indicated  at  the 
junction   of  each  pair  of  consonants,  unless  its  absence  is 
specially  implied  by  one  of  the  methods  given  below.     (§  71.) 

At  the  beginning  or  end  of  an  outline  no  vowel  is  implied 
(unless  written),  except  in  the  special  cases  mentioned  below 
(§§  69,  70).  Initial  and  final  vowels  are  generally  written. 

A  vowel  indicated  in  a  shorthand  outline  is  denoted  by 
a  hyphen  in  the  corresponding  Phonetic  Key. 

5—2 


64  Short  Vowels. 


68.  ACCENTED   SHORT   VOWELS.     Short  vowels  when  ac- 
cented are  often  of  importance  in  distinguishing  words  by 
their  sounds.    The  words  pat,  pet,  pit,  pot,  put,  for  instance, 
are  distinguished  solely  by  the  sounds  of  their  short  vowels. 

The  accented  short  vowels  are  divided  into  two  groups: 
(1)  the  y  (£)  group,  a,  e,  i ;  (2)  the  o  (er)  group,  o,  A,  u. 

The  vowels  a,  e,  i,  are  all  three  represented  by  either  of  the 
2-ticks,  s  or  "  ;  the  vowels  o,  A,  u,  by  the  er-tick,  -  o. 

The  upward  £-tick  is  to  be  used  except  in  cases  where  the 
contrary  is  expressly  stated.  (See  p.  68,  end.) 

The  distinction  between  a,  e,  and  i,  and  likewise  that 
between  o,  A,  and  u,  is  made  by  'mode'  of  writing  in  a  way 
which  will  be  explained  later.  For  the  present  a  and  i  will  be 
written  (and  should  be  pronounced  in  reading)  as  e,  which  is 
intermediate  in  sound  between  them:  and  similarly  o  and  u 
will  be  written,  and  should  be  read,  as  A.  The  legibility  thus 
secured  is  found  to  be  amply  sufficient  for  all  ordinary  pur- 
poses, and  the  further  distinction  is  readily  added  if  precision 
is  required.  (§  79.) 

69.  INITIAL  SHOKT  VOWELS.     The  tick  —  is  used  for  o,  A, 
or  u ;   \  or  s  for  a,  e,  or  i:  the  £-tick  is  written  x  downwards 
before  upstrokes  and  backstrokes,    ^    upwards  before  down- 
strokes  and  c  s/i.     (See  Exercise  V.) 

<W  happy;     "7  us;     f  AZ,  was;    f->it;    vs  if. 

-^j-  Ato,  utter;    J  on;     Q  egg;     ~h-   Ezra;    vr   ell. 

The  sound  o  is  implied  by  a  hook  before  the  characters 
r>  P,  r\  t>,  ra  f>  r~t>  v.  The  character  -  should  be  written  if 
the  vowel  is  accented,  o,  A,  or  u.  (See  §  80.)  Initial  a,  when 
unaccented,  as  in  the  words  appear,  above,  about,  is  generally 
pronounced  o,  but  is  best  written  as  a,  with  the  e-tick  and  not 
with  the  hook ;  and  similarly  in  the  prefix  ad- . 
oj  upon,  <*  off,  cd  offence,  -O  oven,  v^ apyeo,  appear. 

The  character  Q  ery  implies  a  preceding  vowel ;  if  no  vowel 
is  written  the  sound  o  is  implied.     Compare  the  words, 
j*9  r-ndj,  range;      /l°i  or-ndj,  arrange;      779  AT-ndj,  orange. 


Short   Vowels.  65 


The  nasal  compounds  cannot  be  pronounced  without  a  pre- 
ceding vowel:  if  no  vowel  is  written  the  sound  y  is  implied. 
^  ynt,    (J  ynd,   <£  yqko,  (£  yqgo.     (§  89.) 

The  upward  8  is  not  joined  before  /  m,  we  use  the  form 
J  em.     The  word  among  is  written  /y  emAq,  not  4.  enAq. 

70.  FINAL    SHORT   VOWELS  in    English    are    always    un- 
accented.    We    distinguish    only    two    varieties,    which    are 
denoted  by  the  ticks    -  o  (Zr)  and    x    s    y  (ee):   final   «   in 
common  spelling  always  stands  for  the  sound  o. 

Examples  of  final  o  (see  also  Exercise  VI.)  : 
-o-  ofo,  offer;  compare  ^_/a  —  A-tes,  defer  (long  accented). 
CL  k-mo,  comer;    <J£  iqko,  inker  (compare  incur).    (§  89.) 
Final  y  is  written  \  down  after  upstrokes  and  backstrokes, 

/  up  after  downstrokes.     c6       footy,  forty;    V  A7sy.  icy- 
Downwards  after  backward  circles,  upwards  after  forward 

circles;  as  in  X  acy,  ashy;  ^  tAtcy,  touchy;   vs'  efy,  Effie. 
Upward  y  is  written  as  a  hook  after  c  k,   (_  g;  as  in, 

v_yx  dAky,  duckie;    (y  get;       (,  buggy. 
Final  y  is   implied,  and   need  not  be  written,   after  the 
characters  S?  ly,    >.  ry,  ^  ery,    ,,  ny  ;  o  is  written. 

*'  eny,  any;  /nr   1-vly,  lovely;    fa  BAry,  Surrey. 

71.  MEDIAL  SHORT  VOWELS.    A  short  vowel  in  the  middle 
of  an  outline  is  indicated  at  the  junction  of  each  pair  of  con- 
sonants, unless   its   absence   is  specially  implied  by  one   of 
the  following  methods. 

(1)  By  the  use  of  the  compound  characters. 

Compare  6V  stAy,  sty;  t*-\  sety,  city.      /  into;     u-j  not. 

(2)  By  certain  of  the  alternative  consonant  characters. 
Compare  r^—j  inveos,  inverse;   [f*~   n-vo,  never. 

flAW,  flow  ;      rj^  felAW,  fellow  ;     ^  felt. 


trAy,  try;    <sW  hest-ry,  history;    j^  toory,  Tory. 


66  Short   Vowels. 


The  usage  of  the  alternative  consonant  characters  is  very 
fully  illustrated  in  §§  80—89. 

(3)    By  the  '  MODE  OF  HIATUS  '. 

The  joining  of  two  consonant  characters  generally  implies 
an  intervening  short  vowel  ;  if  they  are  not  joined  but  written 
side  by  side,  leaving  a  small  interval  or  hiatus,  the  absence  of 
a  vowel  is  implied.  (See  §  77.) 

Since  all  the  common  compounds  are  specially  provided  for, 
this  mode  is  only  required  in  exceptional  cases;  particularly  in  the 
case  of  compound  words  where  the  consonants  belong  to  separate 

syllables:  e.g.  r^w    fitf-1,  fitful;   ^  ^^     text  bAk,  textbook. 


hand-maid,  uStf  first-class,  ___  /^^~-^  out-do. 
f/y  short-hand;   compare    Cy;  shortened  (p.  107). 

Compare  ^-jly  d-zm-1,  dismal;  ^^/^  d-s-m-1,  decimal. 

This  use  of  the  mode  of  hiatus  is  exactly  analogous  to 
word-division.  A  compound  word  is  divided  where  vowel  in- 
dication requires  it,  but  the  parts  are  written  close  together  to 
show  their  connection.  (Exercise  XXIII.) 

72.  BOLE.  UNACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS  ABE  OMITTED 
WHENEVER  THEY  CAN  BE  INDICATED. 

This  is  the  fundamental  rule  of  vowel  insertion  and 
omission,  and  includes  all  the  others.  (Exercise  XVII.) 

In  some  cases  the  consonant  characters  cannot  be  clearly 
joined  without  a  vowel  tick  :  an  intervening  vowel  cannot  then 
be  indicated,  but  must  be  written.  (Exercise  XVIII.) 

The  tick  /  s  on  account  of  its  shortness  cannot  be  joined 
continuously  to  downward  characters  :  when  s  is  followed  by  a 
downward  character  the  intervening  vowel,  if  any,  is  always 
written. 

Mf~  sister,  (NOT  /    into)  ;  4H  assesses;    L^,  sot. 

When  a  vowel  does  not  intervene  the  mode  of  hiatus  is 
used,  unless  a  special  form  is  provided  for  the  compound. 

v£   Elsie,   VV_  snare,  ir~^  small,  compare    M       stare. 
The  insertion  of  a  vowel  tick  after  characters  like  y  ndj, 


Short   Vowels.  67 


0  ery,  is  required  to  give  a  good  joining  before  C  k,  /  s ;  and 
generally  before  and  after  backward  strokes. 

^V  wishers;  dsff-  historic;   syf1  Paris;    IjTJ  injury. 

In  many  other  cases,  especially  between  downstrokes,  as 
L^_;  mud,  and  after  circle  characters,  as  rf  fat,  the  insertion 
of  a  vowel  tick,  though  not  essential  to  clearness,  makes  the 
outline  easier  to  write  fast. 

Medially  the  distinction  between  the  unaccented  vowels  o 
and  y  is  generally  unimportant:  it  is  therefore  sufficient  to 
indicate  such  a  vowel,  or  if  it  cannot  be  indicated  either 
character  may  be  used;  for  instance,  in  the  word  r^-~M  person, 

the  sound  o  in  the  termination  son  may  be  written  /  y,  be- 
cause the  £-tick  joins  more  clearly  and  easily. 

73.    ACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS  ARE  WRITTEN. 

The  insertion  of  accented  short  vowels  serves  two  purposes ; 
(1)  to  distinguish  words,  (2)  to  mark  the  accent. 

(1)  When  the  characters  o  and  y  represent  accented  vowels, 
the  difference  of  character  is  often  useful  in  distinguishing 
words.  The  distinction  is  most  important  in  the  case  of 
monosyllables  and  rare  words.  (Exercise  VII.) 

In  the  case  of  common  words  such  as  readily  suggest  them- 
selves, especially  connecting  particles,  and  words  which  are 
commonly  slurred  or  unaccented  in  speech,  indicated  vowels 
are  generally  omitted.  This  not  only  possesses  the  advantage 
of  brevity,  but  also  serves  to  distinguish  them  from  rarer 
words,  which  are  fully  written.  (See  Exercise  XXI.) 

Thus  we  write  s~^>  but  (NOT  s~^_,),    u~>  not,  ^-/  this. 

ft* 
Compare  r^-*  bet,  y     net,  ^-£7  t  hus. 

In  short  words  and  in  cases  where  the  accent  does  not 
require  marking,  the  £-tick,  for  a,  e,  or  i,  may  sometimes  be 
omitted.  To  distinguish  such  words  from  words  containing 
o,  A,  or  u,  it  is  sufficient  always  to  insert  the  latter ;  and  if  an 
accented  vowel  has  been  omitted,  it  should  be  pronounced  as  e 
in  reading. 

The  upward  e-tick  should  never  be  omitted  between  down- 
strokes,  in  words  like  pet,  set,  let,  met,  when  it  gives  a  clearer 


68  Short   Vowels. 


outline.  It  may  nearly  always  be  omitted  after  t,  d,  3[,  q,  tc,  dj, 
when  followed  by  downstrokes,  especially  n,  az,  or  aq.  (See 
Exercise  XIX.)  In  some  other  syllables  such  as  pell,  fell,  rell, 
nell,  ness,  where  it  joins  continuously,  its  insertion  or  omission 
is  generally  immaterial  and  makes  little  difference  to  the 
outline. 

(2)  In  words  of  more  than  one  or  two  syllables,  the  sounds 
of  the  short  vowels  are  seldom  the  only  means  of  distinction. 
But  in  this  case  the  insertion  of  accented  vowels  is  useful  in  a 
different  way,  namely  in  marking  the  accent.  This  often 
makes  a  word  much  easier  to  read,  especially  if  it  is  a  rare 
word,  or  if  it  is  accented  in  an  unusual  way. 
-V  finesse,  w'-^-  Thibet,  ^ll  open'd,  ^-^fj  depend. 

VCN-^V    yesterday,    ~\ui  understand,    ^/~bA.  advertise. 

vjxj  effort,      rj^  permit,     '/f^'  property,     -4^~^>,  liberty. 
'M.  attic,    A-^    attack,    ^-G^  etiquette,    V^NJ  abbot,    v~^,  abut. 

The  insertion  of  a  vowel  tick  gives  no  information  about 
the  accent  in  cases,  such  as  those  of  §  72,  where  its  insertion  is 
required  on  other  grounds.  The  insertion  of  an  unaccented 
vowel,  when  not  required,  is  misleading;  it  is  in  all  cases  better 
simply  to  indicate  a  short  vowel  than  to  insert  it  wrongly. 

DOWNWARD  E-TICK.  The  cases  in  which  the  downward 
2-tick  is  used  medially  for  a,  e,  or  i,  are  as  follows : — 

It  is  always  used  before  p,  to,  f,  v,  except  after  p,  to,  y. 

Before  other  characters  which  require  it  initially  (namely, 
backstrokes  and  el,  §  70),  it  is  only  used  after  characters  which 
require  it  finally  (namely,  back-circles  and  t,  d,  §  68),  and  after 
k,  g.  (Exercise  VII.)  Thus, 

i~  sap,  ^  kick,  ^P  kill,  ^  thick,  ^  chill,  ^Jp  tell. 
It  may  be  noticed  that  the  downward  tick  is  never  used  after 
the  characters  ^  /~\  \  ,  or  before  the  characters  w  w  <j>  v^ 
under  any  circumstances;  and  that  the  cases  in  which  it 
represents  one  of  the  short  vowels  a,  e,  and  i,  can  never  clash 
with  those  in  which  it  is  used  for  the  long  vowel  Ay  (§  62). 


Mode  of  Hiatus.  69 


MODE    OF   HIATUS. 

74.  The  Mode  of  Hiatus  consists  in  lifting  the  pen  and 
leaving  a  small  interval  between  two  characters  instead  of 
joining  them  together.    It  is  chiefly  used  in  the  expression  of 
the  rarer  and  more  difficult  combinations  of  sounds. 

There  are  two  sizes  of  interval :  the  small  interval,  or  hiatus, 
which  is  made  as  small  as  possible;  and  the  large  interval,  or 
word-space,  which  must  be  kept  sufficiently  large  to  be  easily 
distinguished  from  the  former. 

There  are  three  modes.  In  the  first  or  w-mode  (1),  the 
second  character  is  commenced  above  the  end  of  the  first ;  in 
the  second  or  o-mode  (2),  on  the  same  level;  in  the  third  or 
y-mode  (3),  below. 

75.  BEFORE   A  VOWEL  CHAEACTEE,   or  an  implied  vowel, 
modes  (1)  and  (3)  indicate  w  and  y  respectively.     (Ex.  XXH.) 

In  phrases  and  compound  words,  w  and  y  are  generally 
expressed  by  mode.  Mode  (2)  is  used  before  the  h  circle. 

f^/^>  not  yet;     \s\Iwould;     v_y/   d'yoti;     ^towards. 
/"^9/  b-h-nd,  behind;  '"yj  b-yond;  ^N^  b-weyl,  bewail. 

The  unaccented  short  vowels  y  and  w  (oo),  when  immediately 
followed  by  another  vowel,  become  truly  consonantal,  and  are 
expressed  by  mode,  especially  in  terminations:  for  convenience 
the  w-mode  is  extended  to  the  representation  of  all  such 
terminations  as  -ual,  -uum,  -uous,  etc.,  where  the  u  is  un- 
accented, and  represents  the  compound  sound  yw. 

1/7  Indian;   i^^-Jfi  sodium;  $^O  kryeycon,  creation, 
jf* -usual;  o-i ^3 continuation ;  /^-gr^>  valuable ;  ^~w  vacuum. 

76.  MODE  OF  HIATUS  BEFORE  OR  AFTER  A  TICK.    In  the 
o-mode  after  a  tick,  the  next  character  is  begun  nearer  the 
middle  than  the  end  of  the  tick;  in  the  w-mode,  above  the 
upper  end ;  in  the  y-mode,  below  the  lower  end ;  and  similarly 
before  a  tick. 

#<v>   mishap;    /y-'  synw-t,  suet;   7W  swiyt,  sweet. 


70  Mode  of  Hiatus. 


The  end  of  the  character  //  n  is  for  these  modes  considered 

to  be  its  tipper  end,  whether  the  second  stroke  is  inserted  or 
not.  The  same  rule  applies  to  q,  and  the  n  compounds,  us,  nt. 
Similarly  the  beginning  of  an  m  is  considered  to  he  its  lower 
end,  whether  the  upstroke  is  written  or  not.  [§  77  (3).] 


"  rly,  re;    4^^  riyd,  read;     J  riym,  ream. 


c,\    Conway,      H sincere,     /-v-/-,  poignant,      I?    minutiae. 

/  h  'I  1^ 

11.     MODE  OF  HIATUS  BEFORE  A  CONSONANT  CHARACTER. 

(1)  BETWEEN  TWO  CONSONANTS,  mode  (2)  implies  the 
absence  of  a  vowel.  (§  71.)  Mode  (1)  is  used  for  terminations, 
see  pp.  85,  92 ;  mode  (3)  for  unaccented  ii,  yw,  as  in  the  words, 

r*X,  jwpulate,     "£_     occupy,     "\^  amputate,     r~fr^j(  voluble. 

After  the  characters  ft  ry,   ft  ery,    t  ny,  which  necessitate 
a  following  vowel,  mode  (2)  is  used  to  express  the  vowel  iy. 
If  no  character  follows,  a  dot  is  used. 

/'•  niy,  knee;    **  nlyl,  kneel;     *^  niyd,  need. 

j"  rly,  re;    J^'  rlyd,  read;     * 

Similarly  uw  is  expressed  by  mode  (2)  after  -r  el,  V  ly 
(as  suggested  by  the  alphabetic  word  loo)  (see  §  86) : 

(vl  gluwm,  gloom;   ./S  luwod,  leeicard;  °JtK_  hal-luwyo. 

In  monosyllables  (except  knee,  re)  the  dot  may  be  omitted, 
because  the  vowel  is  necessarily  long. 

flK  fluw,  flew;  Jj  3[riy,  three. 

In  other  cases  a  dot  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  used  as 
a  general  mark  of  abbreviation  (see  §  94) ;  and  the  use  of  the 
second  mode  between  two  consonants  in  cases  where,  owing 
to  the  exigencies  of  pronunciation,  a  vowel  must  intervene, 
implies  the  vowel  of  the  alphabetic  word,  generally  the  alpha- 
betic word  itself  in  a  compound  (see  §  91) ;  thus, 

n>l  form,      C  join,     ^,  peace,      <-r  keys,     /'-y  bees. 


Mode  of  Hiatus.  71 

But  except  in  initial  syllables,  and  in  the  case  of  iy  after 
the  characters  ry  and  ny,  and  of  uw  after  ly,  it  is  generally 
better  to  write  the  vowel  character.  (Exercise  XXV.) 

(2)  AFTEB  A  LONG  VOWEL  CHAEACTEB.  The  mode  of  hiatus 
after  a  long  vowel  and  before  a  consonant,  except  m,  implies  a 
short  vowel.  Modes  (1),  (2),  and  (3),  are  used  to  distinguish 
the  unaccented  vowels  w,  o,  y ;  but  the  distinction  is  generally 
of  little  importance,  and  need  not  be  very  carefully  observed : 
the  sound  w  does  not  occur  in  this  way  in  English.  (Ex.  XXIV.) 

</  sAyon,  scion ;    £v_  ^^  akWAyod,  acquired;     iJ  ruwyn,  ruin. 

I  01 

/Or^vowyl,  vowel;  <~*^  pAwysy,  poesy ;   i^\^  society. 

When  no  consonant  follows,  the  o  or  y  tick  is  simply 
joined :  as  in  o/^  showy,  Q f~  shower,  -J~  wooer,  \_  seer. 

If  the  vowels  do  not  join  clearly  the  mode  of  hiatus  is  used ; 
the  w-mode  after  an  w  (oo)  vowel ;  the  y-mode  after  an  y  (ee) 
vowel ;  as  in  i^  sower ;  <.  sayer ;  ^-_  Ayo,  ire ;  ^  Chaos. 

When  an  o-vowel  is  immediately  followed  by  another  vowel, 
r  is  usually  sounded,  but  the  character  ^  ery  need  not  usually 
be  written,  unless  great  precision  is  required,  because  the  r  trill 
is  sufficiently  implied  by  the  use  of  the  o  vowel;  exceptions, 
such  as  lawyer,  are  so  extremely  rare  as  never  to  give  trouble. 

J^v^7  1-booryos,  laborious ;     *!___  s-pyeoryo,  superior. 

I —  / 

/    U  nearest,     — -,  serious,      L — f  series,       — =X-X  period. 

The  distinction  between  the  sounds  awer  and  aw,  as  in 
drawers  and  draws,  cores  and  cause,  is  not  commonly  made  in 
conversation ;  but  may  be  marked  in  shorthand  by  adding  o ; 

•^-4 — ~  drawer;  cp.  r~  lawyer,   Jr^  Laureate,  <rv   Laura. 
An  accented  short  vowel,  following  a  long  vowel,  is  written, 
if  required  to  mark  the  accent ; 

Y'   Ae6llc,      Nsyt/7  aerial,       .^   zootomy,     '~\fl  biology. 


72  Mode  of  Hiatus. 


(3)  AFTER  A  SHORT  VOWEL  CHARACTER  and  before  a  con- 
sonant, the  three  modes  are  used  to  distinguish  between  the 
accented  short  vowels.  (Except  before  m  (Exercise  XV.),  and  in 
very  special  cases,  this  method  is  never  used  in  practice,  see  §  79.) 

a,  e,  and  i,  are  distinguished  by  modes  (1),  (2),  and  (3),  after 
the  £-tick:  o,  A,  and  u,  similarly,  after  the  er-tick;  thus,  • 
r?  pat  (1),  r/^pet  (2),  ^  pit  (3);    r^  pot  (I),  ^  put  (3). 

/V  swim;     N'  swam;    _/  swAm,  swum;  /  /  swon,  swan; 

q/  sham,    ^/  Shem,      <\'    Ham,        \  L    Hymer,     ^/  Shyman. 
Of    princess,  ^4   princes;     o^  present,  O*y  present. 

The  character  to  be  used  for  a,  e,  and  i,  whether  s  or  /  , 
is  determined  by  the  same  rule  as  for  final  vowels  (§  70). 

An  accented  short  vowel  is  always  immediately  followed  by 
a  consonant  so  that  this  method  cannot  clash  with  the  ex- 
pression of  w  and  y. 

Mode  (1),  above,  is  used  for  «  and  o,  the  vowels  in  above. 

78.  In  actual  practice  the  Mode  of  Hiatus  may  often  be 
dispensed  with.  This  is  generally  the  ease  with  the  distinction 
between  a,  e,  and  i;  0,  A,  and  u.  The  hiatus  need  never  be 
made  after  e  and  A,  mode  (2),  unless  it  is  desired  to  mark  the 
accent  very  particularly  ;  and  it  is  usually  sufficient  to  write  e 
for  a  and  i,  and  A  for  o  and  u. 

In  long  and  common  words  the  refinements  of  vowel  indica- 
tion, involving  the  mode  of  hiatus,  may  be  often  neglected 
without  much  danger  to  legibility. 

For  instance  the  outline  ^3-?  represents  apriyceyt,  which  is 
an  intelligible,  though  not  a  perfect  pronunciation  of  appreciate. 
The  full  form  ^6  apriycyeyt  involves  hiatus  twice.  (§  84.) 


~- 

Similarly     r^7  p-t-k-lo,    c^\  op-t-n-ty,  iff  n-tr-1, 


/^~x     ed-keycon,  ^">t^    br-k-f-st,   e£,   k-lk-l-t, 

are  sufficiently  suggestive  of  particular,  opportunity,  natural, 
education,  breakfast,  calculate,  though  not  strictly  correct. 


Mode  of  Hiatus.  73 


It  is  not  intended  to  recommend  the  writing  of  words 
incorrectly,  but  simply  to  illustrate  the  fact  that  the  system  is 
so  constructed  that  the  neglect  of  such  refinements  of  accuracy, 
does  not  make  the  writing  illegible. 

After  common  prefixes,  like  ad,  ob,  ab,  which  are  rarely 
followed  by  a  vowel  the  mode  of  hiatus  need  not  be  used, 
A~^~b — 7  adverse,  \^/~b — ^  diverse,  sr~\_X^  abdicate. 

Similarly  before  common  terminations  and  inflections, 
especially  -s,  -'d,  the  mode  of  hiatus  may  often  be  dispensed 
with,  if  great  precision  is  not  required.  Cases  like  the  follow- 
ing are  exceedingly  rare,  and  would  be  almost  invariably  dis- 
tinguished by  the  context :  %,  hatch'd  and  hatchet; 
M  ridg'd  and  rigid;  ^  prints  and  prentice. 

The  first  word  in  each  case  should,  strictly  speaking,  be 
written  with  hiatus. 

79.  When  two  characters  have  been  joined  together  by 
mistake,  in  a  case  where  the  mode  of  hiatus  should  have  been 
used,  the  following  correction  marks  are  employed.  Mode  (1)  is 
indicated  by  a  dot  placed  above  the  character  which  should 
have  been  separated ;  mode  (3)  by  a  dot  below.  The  omission 
of  medial  h  is  marked  by  a  small  circle;  the  simple  hiatus, 
mode  (2),  by  a  vertical  tick.  These  marks  are  sometimes 
useful  for  purposes  of  revision,  when  accuracy  is  required. 
r^>  pit,  rf-1  pat,  "^i  apprehend, /^~^--Lj  it'did'not. 

The  consonants  w  and  y  are  generally  important  for  the 
recognition  of  a  word,  and  should  always  be  expressed  by  mode 
where  they  occur;  they  should  not  be  habitually  omitted  in 
writing  and  dotted  in  afterwards.  On  the  other  hand,  the 
distinction  between  the  short  vowels  is  seldom  essential;  it 
may  therefore  be  generally  neglected  in  writing,  and  may  be 
made  afterwards  by  dot  if  necessary. 

These  dots  are  very  seldom  required  except  in  rare  words, 
or  in  unfamiliar  proper  names,  or  in  passages,  like  that  on 
p.  92,  where  the  context  happens  to  be  of  no  use  in  indicating 
the  right  word.  They  need  not  be  placed  with  any  greater 
accuracy  than  the  i  dots  in  longhand.  (Exercise  XXVI.) 


74  Consotiants. 


CONSONANTS. 

80.  '    p,  r\  B,    ">  f,  /"&  v.     In  joining  these  characters 
after  vowels,  except  J  uw,  ^  ow,    '  y,  the  angle  should  be 
marked.  A  hook  may  be  introduced  to  sharpen  the  angle,  as  in 

<5         hAWpt,  hop'd;  ^^°~  over. 

This  hook  is  used  to  imply  the  vowel  o,  not  only  initially, 
but  also  in  syllables.  After  the  downstrokes  s,  m,  1,  the  hook 
becomes  a  loop;  and  the  character  A  need  not  be  inserted 
unless  the  accent  requires  marking.  (Exercise  VIII.) 

V^~N  tub,   cr\  cup,   <i^~~b  shove,   <A  sup,  fa  muff,    ^-j>  love. 

Except  after  p,  to,  y,  the  downward  \  £-tick  is  always  used 
for  a,  e,  i,  before  the  characters  p,  b,  f,  v. 

On  cap,    (-,    map,    **\   lap,    >vs  Tap,  >-N~,  tap,  rV  pap. 
Compare  the  outlines  of  ripe,  type  (§  61). 

The  compound  /"?  sp,  as  in  ^  lispt,  'no  suspicion,  is  dis- 
tinguished from  A  s-p  by  deepening  the  curve  of  the  p. 

Similarly  in  the  compounds  mp,  mf,  mb;  p,  f,  and  b,  might 
be  written  n  ,  Q  ,  /?  ,  respectively  ;  but  the  distinction  is  of 
little  importance,  because  cases  like  map  and  imp  are  sufficiently 
distinguished  by  the  vowel  preceding  the  m  :  the  characters 
may  therefore  be  simply  joined,  as  in  the  following  examples  ; 

(TTXi  ember,  y//^0  import,  AH   emphatic,  OS  camp,  d~)  camped. 

81.  w  T,  **~s  D,    <j>  H,  \-9  a.     These  characters  are  used 
for  t,  d,  3[,  n,  except  in  the  special  cases  mentioned  below. 
They  generally  present  the  best  joinings,  and  they  do  not  leave 
the  line  of  writing. 

The  characters  3  at,  )  had,  s>  hath,  o)  with,  are  chiefly 
used  for  the  corresponding  alphabetic  words,  and  in  phrases 
and  compounds  containing  them  ;  such  as, 

within,  5  without,  d<f^  withhold,  °__^)  herewith. 


They  are  also  used  after  the  long  vowels  Ay,  ao.     (§  61.) 


Consonants.  75 


The  character  ^  or  v  Ay  may  be  omitted,  except  initially 
and  in  the  syllables  S  kite,  ^  fight,  being  implied  by  using 
the  special  characters ;  thus,  f>  sight,  c>  quite, 

s~\.  bite,       \  guide,       7T~^  provide,     ^.  tied,        h  night, 

4 

mighty,   J,    lighten,     ft\  pride,    \. ^  defied,     y\    neither. 

After  other  vowels  these  characters  are  not  used. 
— <s  earth,  NOT     3  ;     ff^J  ought,  NOT  f~> ;     — ^  out,  NOT  ^>, 

The  characters   5    s   are  used  in  forming  the  compounds 
pt,  kt,  ft.  pj[,  ta[,  fii. 
Vz>  active,    **>  rack'd,    ^  apt,  *$  oft,  -^^  depth,  ^f-f^, fifth. 

After  these  characters  and  aq  (§  89),  final  y  is  written 
downwards,  the  inflections  -eth,  -ed  are  added  thus,  s>  ~)  , 
and  -ing  by  the  cross  stroke  (§  91). 

/h  writeth,     tj   writing,  \    acted,  (~^  invited. 

The  character  y  d  is  also  used  in  forming  the  auxiliaries 
{  could,  }  would;  and  for  the  terminations  -hood,  -ward; 

the  w  being  expressed  by  'mode'. 

\)  wayward,  r6\foncard,  ^~^  hardihood. 
The  compound  U  st  is  formed  by  joining  /  s  and  w  t ;  the 
upstroke  of  the  t  is  brought  up  to  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  s 
for  the  sake  of  lineality,  and  the  combination  is  made  straighter 
and  narrower  to  avoid  confusion  with  k;  if  st  were  written 
6  st,  simply  joining  the  characters,  confusion  would  probably 
occur.  The  compound  /  /  nd  is  similarly  formed  from  /  n  and 
\-s  d,  and  /  nt  from  /  n  and  w  t. 

82.  c  K,  £  o,  6  TC,  (o  DJ.  The  tops  of  these  characters 
should  be  well  curled  over  in  writing,  like  the  top  of  a  long- 
hand c,  to  distinguish  them  from  straight  characters  like 

tfst,    /  nt.     Compare  d  k-m,  J  st-m. 


76  Consonants. 


All  vowels  join  very  easily  both  before  and  after  these  cha- 
racters :  the  insertion  of  a  vowel  tick  is  sometimes  required  to 
make  the  joining  easier  (§  72) ; 

'-T  took,  ^~\^  book,  •*£  look,  L^  suck,  t^  sack. 

In  joining  c  k  after  /  s  in  the  compound  sk,  a  hook  may 
be  introduced  to  sharpen  the  angle  ;  C  Esk,  cL  skit,  (*,  sky. 

The  common  compound  x  is  simply  written  ^  ks=  if  a, 
vowel  intervenes,  it  is  inserted,  as  in  </  kiss,  <—n  cusp. 

In  the  prefix  ex,  the  initial  vowel  is  omitted  if  unaccented ; 
as  in,  9x  expect;  compare  \,  'extant,  ^  extent,  ~t  exercise. 

The  prefix  kon  is  for  convenience  written  0  before  down- 
strokes,  such  as  /  s,  c  k;  instead  of  writing  C  k-n,  and 
using  the  mode  of  hiatus. 

ou   constant,  OC. concur,  (>— 0  condition,  ct\^r  consider. 

The  n  character  is  added  to  the  circle  before  upstrokes  and 
vowels;  as  in,  7a — confer,  at  connect.  (Exercise  X.) 

The  special  forms  g  (^  are  given  to  the  compounds  tc,  dj, 
which  are  very  common  in  English.  The  true  guttural 
sibilants  only  occur  in  foreign  words,  such  as  Loch,  Ich. 

The  backward  characters  are  otherwise  appropriate  to  tc, 
dj,  because  these  sounds  are  often  etymologically  descended  from 
corrupted  gutturals;  compare  the  English  'church'  with  the 
Scotch  'kirk',  or  the  Italian  c,  pronounced  as  ch,  tc,  with  the 
Latin  c,  pronounced  as  k. 

83.  /  s,  c*  J  z.  The  alternative  characters  for  z  are 
required  to  facilitate  joinings.  The  general  rule  is  to  use  f 
when  disjoined,  and  after  vowel  characters  except  uw,  ow,  oy, 
and  upward  y.  (Cp.  q,  §  89,  and  see  Exercise  XI.) 

The  distinction  between  s  and  z  is  most  important  at  the 
beginning  or  end  of  a  word :  compare,  V^  seal,  ^T  zeal  ; 
pressures,  T  precos,  precious;  ^~f  this,  ^—$  q-z,  these. 


Consonants.  77 


Medially  the  distinction  is  neither  so  important  nor  so  easy 
to  preserve  :  the  straight  tick,  as  in  ~\P  easy,  may  generally  be 
used  for  the  z  sound,  just  as  the  letter  s  is  used  in  the  common 
spelling  ;  but  if  great  precision  is  required,  the  tick  can  always 
be  curved  for  z,  especially  in  words  which  are  spelt  with  a  z, 
such  as,  1^^,  wizard,  u>  stanzas,  ^>  frenzy. 

s,  z  INFLECTIONS.  The  sounds  s  and  z  occur  so  frequently 
as  terminal  inflections  that  special  provision  is  made  for  this 
case.  The  inflective  s  is  expressed  by  a  hook  after  p,  to,  t,  d,  q. 

\o  apes,  r*~?  adds,  $  acts,      </  wings. 
After  circles  and  Q  ery,  the  hook  forms  a  double  loop  ;  thus, 

Jr~&  lives,      p>  ashes,        (Q  ages,     ff  actions,      <vj  hurries, 
\~B>  themselves,     ^a>  thinks,    ]£  thanks,     O  circumstances. 

After  c  k,  (  g,  u  st,  f  z,  ^  nt,  fj  nd,  f  1,  the  s  or  z 
character  is  simply  joined. 

/^>_  books,   Ju    lists,    C    eggs,    /J  hands,  j  ells,   <  assizes. 
After  m,  sp,  the  mode  of  hiatus  is  used,  as    /  stems,  <?>!  wisps. 
Special    forms    are   given    to    the   common  terminations 
M   ns,  nee  ;  /  nz,  ns.    Compare  the  words, 
^  fens,     nil  fence,      ml   fenced,,   nd     fancy,     <T#    fancies, 
if       fancied,     <Try  funny,     ^J  finesse,    ^tt  happinesses. 

fr        ^  III 

The  character  w  'd  is  joined  continuously  after  /^  ez, 
for  the  -ed  inflection,  as  in  M^Cy  supposed,  v\j  analyzed. 

These  special  forms  should  be  restricted  to  terminations; 
in  other  cases  the  combinations  are  rare,  and  the  mode  of 
hiatus  should  be  used. 


•il^^  instead,      7v~>Ns  Wenzdey,  Wednesday;     ' 
h~  \/^/\  subsidy,      4<*    eqzAyyty,  anxiety;  NOT    ^^  eqz  ety. 
c.  6 


78  Consonants. 


84.  c,  J.  The  circle  of  c  (sh)  is  always  turned  backwards, 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  longhand  letter  c  ;  that  of  j  (zh) 
(and  of  h)  forwards,  in  the  same  direction  as  ±he  loop  of  the 
longhand  letter  j.  (See  §  55.)  (Exercise  XII.) 

The  character  &  is  used  for  c,  after  k,  g,  and  when  disjoined; 
6  _  cyer,  sheer;  M  riyc,  riche  (Fr.)  ;  \  _  kecyeo,  cashier. 

Otherwise  the  s  tick  is  omitted,  and  the  small  circle,  turned 
backwards,  is  directly  attached  to  vowel  stems  ;  thus, 

6      harsher,    [ft-   masher,  *V  machine,    >-Q-  Russia,  &  lash. 


spacious,   \  —  *odish,     r^o  push,      n?  pish. 

Short  vowels  before  and  after  c  are  written  like  initial  and 
final  vowels.  Initially,  the  £-tick  is  written  upwards  before  c. 

The  circle  c  is  for  convenience  turned  the  other  way  in  the 
common  phrases,  <s^  shall  be,  5~b  shall  have;  in  the  word 
c/  such;  and  in  the  termination  <r>  -ship,  as  in  v-ff\  worship, 
j(  kinship.  The  circle  c  is  also  used  in  forming  the  convenient 
abbreviations,  6  m-c,  much,  x>  ec,  each. 

The  consonants  s,  t,  etc.,  when  followed  by  y,  are  often 
corrupted  to  c,  tc,  etc.,  in  conversation;  in  cases  where  both 
pronunciations  are  equally  common,  that  should  be  chosen 
which  gives  the  clearest  and  most  suggestive  outline. 

4j  issue;    /-~b  —  ^  virtue;    <5""C.  hosier;     (^^  exposure. 
^-L  future;    ^picture;     fa  scripture  ;     (Jb-.  indenture. 


j    temperature;      /&_  n-tco,  nature;     O--""*/^-^  procedure. 
Compare    rf>  fortune  ;    refactions;       ?-  pressure. 


When  c  is  combined  with  a  consonant,  no  vowel  inter- 
vening, the  mode  of  hiatus  is  used,  except  after  1  and  n,  and 
before  t,  to  which  the  circle  may  be  directly  joined; 

^°7  eqcos,  anxious;     ^0^  up-shot;     0,0^  off  -shoot. 

f-n-nc-1,  financial  ;    A£  Welsh;  <f  wisht  ;  jnf  astonish'd. 


Consonants.  79 


The  form    /  is  used  for  the  compound  ntc,  as  in  inch, 
r^j  pinch,  ^M  bencher;    compare     L  eyncont,  ancient. 
The  form  /9  is  used  for  the  compound  ndj ;  as  in  the  words, 
ctfo.^  hinged,         [Jr      angel,     4<M  engine,     fa  changes. 

The  sound  j  is  very  rare  in  English,  except  in  the  com- 
pounds dj,  ndj.  It  occurs  chiefly  in  the  terminations  -sion  -jon 
(see  §  85),  and  -sure  -jo,  as  in  pleasure,  treasure,  leisure ;  the 

latter  is  written  thus ;   V-  ejo,  azure;   /     mejo,  measure. 

85.  CON,  JON  (-TION,  -SION).  (Exercise  XIII.)  The  large 
circle  is  turned  'backwards'  for  con  (except  after  k,  aq,  oo), 
'forwards'  (clockwise)  for  jon.  After  long  vowels  (except  iy) 
the  circle  is  turned  on  the  stem  of  the  character ;  thus, 

(/SO  station,    n^  emotion,     £  O  exertion,     u_Q  solution, 

asion,     (/^caution,    C\O  collation,    Q^Q  collusion. 
After  short  vowels  and  iy,  the  con  circle  is  written  as  an 
independent  loop,  like  the  longhand  letter  o,  and  is  not  turned 
on  the  stem  of  the  vowel ;  thus,   K)  (NOT  P )  session. 

The  downward  £-tick  is  omitted  before  the  circle,  as  in 
petition,  below.     Compare  the  con  and  jon  circles ; 
CC-.  concussion,  r^Q  petition,  C^%Q  coalition,  v-'"*vo  depletion, 

QO  concision,     ^~i£>  vision,    CfQ)  collision,     /y5)  lesion. 

After  a  consonant,  if  no  vowel  intervenes,  the  circle  is 
turned  directly  on  the  stem  of  the  character;  it  is  turned 
' forwards'  after  k  and  aq ;  thus, 

£o  exception,      c<7   question,     4^  emulsion,      K)  exemption, 
V  tension,     >  action,     ^U  distinction,      ^-  function. 

The  large  circle  is  most  convenient  as  a  prefix  or  termina- 
tion ;  it  does  not  always  join  well  in  the  middle  of  an  outline. 

In  adding  inflections  and  terminations  vowels  should  be 
inserted  where  they  facilitate  joinings ;  cp.  rvtf^  passionate, 

*v<N-^  impassioned,  LP  intentional,  C.*^  questionist ;  but  the 

6—2 


80  Consonants. 


mode  of  hiatus  should  be  used  if  the  joining  does  not  happen 
to  be  clear  and  easy.  The  -ing  termination  is  added  with  the 
cross-stroke  (§  91),  and  the  -s  inflection  by  a  small  circle  or 
hook  (§  83) ;  the  character  )  is  used  for  the  -ed  inflection  after 
the  forward  circle,  as  in  cautioned  or  occasioned. 

This  circle  should  only  be  used  for  the  sounds  con,  jon,  when 
they  represent  the  substantival  termination. 

Adjectives,  such  as  ri—P  Persian,  hh  sufficient,  are  written 
alphabetically. 

86.  L,  E.  The  loops  1,  r,  can  be  written  either  forwards, 
>  ry,  0  ly,  in  the  direction  of  the  hands  of  a  clock ;  or  back- 
wards, fl  el,  /}  ery,  'counter-clockwise'.  The  difference  of 
appearance  produced  is  sufficient  for  the  purpose  of  vowel 
indication.  Forward  1  and  forward  r  indicate  the  absence  of 
preceding  vowels,  and  are  used  in  forming  the  compounds  pi, 
fl,  si,  etc.,  pr,  tr,  kr,  etc.  (See  Exercise  XIV.) 

rQ     plate,  5  slight,    £    cry,   a   pry,  \  actress,    ^L  Henry, 
R  shrine.   Compare  ,-vo  pellet,  $  silt,  rtf  perry,  ^2,  aspirate. 
Special  forms  are  given  to  the  compounds  kl,  gl ;  thus, 
(D      clay,  (H^_j  glad;  compare  <Jr  cull,  (_/  gull. 

Backward  JP  el,  is  written  like  the  longhand  I,  but  with 
a  more  open  loop.  It  is  written  half-size  to  indicate  the  absence 
of  a  vowel  after  it,  as  in  the  combinations  Ip,  If,  Ik,  Is,  etc. 

A$  wealth,    fi>  self,   »&  help,   <-$  pelt,   ^*~^  old,  K  milk. 
Compare  the  words,     /  realm,     /'  relume.     [§  77,  (1).] 


The  mute  r,  which  occurs  before  a  consonant  in  common 
spelling,  as  in  art,  short,  indicates  one  of  the  o  vowels,  and  is 
not  written  with  the  loop  character.  The  loop  characters  re- 
present the  trilled  r,  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  red,  herring. 

Backward  r,   /;  ery,  is  used  after  vowels ;  as  in  the  words, 

^  curry,    <-Jff     tomorrow,     ^~,  airy,      "\   weary. 


Consonants.  81 


Forward  r,  fi  ry,  may  be  used  if  the  preceding  vowel  is 
'  clipped  '  in  conversation,  as  in  the  words, 

Jr*  p'raps,    <^v,  separate,  ^~^f  different,  ^hr  emp'ror. 

Some  dialects  trill  the  r  in  words  like  art,  short,  before  a 
consonant.  This  peculiarity  of  pronunciation  may  be  indicated, 
if  desired,  by  inserting  the  character  Q  ,  written  half  size 
to  indicate  the  absence  of  a  following  vowel,  as  in  /tv  art. 

87.  M.  The  character  /  em  is  used  to  indicate  a  pre- 
ceding short  vowel ;  in  all  other  cases  the  downstroke  /  m  is 
not  joined,  but  is  written  so  as  to  end  near  the  end  of  the 
preceding  character.  (Exercise  XV.) 

n  s-m,  some;  of  k-m,  come;    J,   m-m-ry,  memory;  flr^amid. 

^-1  SAom,  psalm;  ^\/  time;  (Q_/ germ;  c     /  came;  //^  smoke. 

In  rare  words  the  particular  short  vowel  should  be  specified, 
as  in,  LI  mummery,  \jj  Tarn,  rvl  Pym.  [See  §  77  (3).] 

The  word  man,  and  the  unaccented  termination  m-n,  are 
written  /  ,  without  a  vowel  tick  between  the  m  and  n  ;  thus, 

a//  human,    W  woman,   A/  wim-n,     H  men,     Cj /  German. 

When  a  vowel  does  not  intervene  between  m  and  t  or  d,  the 

characters  are  joined,  giving  the  forms  L  emt,  /t/emd,  which  are 
analogous  to    /  nt,   /  /  nd,  but  are  written   above  the  line, 

like   //  em:   the  upstroke  is  omitted,  unless  a   short  vowel 

precedes.     The  form  fj  emt  is  most  commonly  used  as  an 
abbreviation  for  the  termination  -ment,  which  is  usually  written 

wit  in  longhand.      ^  empty,      HAJ  sentiment,      //,  intimate, 
dimm'd,  At/  seem'd,  lln  momentous,   Jvu  impkments. 
argumentative,    ^if>  parliamentary,    ^  amusement. 


82  Consonants. 


88.  N.     The  downstroke  of  n  differs  from  that  of  m  in 
beginning  on  the  line  instead  of  ending  on  it,  and  in  being 
directly  joined  to  preceding  characters.     Compare 

p  new,    If  mew  ;      i  _  near,    /  _   mere  ;     U  none,    fl  mem. 
The  character  /'  ny  is  used  when  n  is  followed  by  a  vowel  ; 

as  in,   i/  know,  y    nor,  y-^  now,    A\  nay,  A^J>-  another. 

The  angle  in  the  combination   v~  no  is  rounded  off  ;   but 
before  final  o  the  upstroke  is  omitted  ;  compare, 

IT  numb;  L^J  nut;   I  m-no,  manner  ;  4  inner;  ~i  ono,  honour. 
The  compound  -mn-  is  written  //  ,  as  in  ff-1   omniscient, 

w    chimney  :  m  is  joined  after  n  thus,  J"  animal,    Jf  enemy. 

The  upstroke  of  n  is  omitted  if  no  vowel  follows.  •  The 
prefixes  in,  un,  are  joined  before  upstrokes. 

rV^I  unborn,  r~b  —  7inverse,  cp.^Ts  —  7  universe,  W  initial. 

89.  Q  (ing).     The  character   ^"  ,  called  Aq  (ung),  is  used 
after  vowels,  except  upward    '  y,  -^  uw,  ^  ow,   ^  oy,  in 
which  cases  the  other  curve  J  aq  is  used.     (Exercise  XVI.) 

^\  sowing,  ^^  saying,  ^~^~  dying,  r(   sawing, 


vowing,  J~J  toying. 
y  tAq,  tongue;  ^  sung,  ^V  bung,   /  lung,  /ft  rung,  Jr  thong. 

The  opposite  curve  J  ,  called  aq  (ang),  is  used  after  upward 
y,  and  after  most  consonants,  especially   r  z,  r,  p,  fl  i}   ^  nt. 

y  sang,    ^~y  bang,     X\  rang,     C/l  gingham. 
£•  sizing,    o/7  shilling,   "J.  hunting,  A  supping,   ^  watching. 

/->  living,  g^j  halting,    "j1  thing,    "M  ding,  •&  washing. 


Conso'tiants.  83 


By  omitting  the  first  and  third  strokes  of  /  iqo,  we  obtain 
the  back  upward  flourish  ~N  iq  (ing).  This  character  is  only 
used  for  the  participial  termination  -ing  after  certain  con- 
sonants, especially  u  t,  //  nd,  A  Q  r,  and  back  circles. 

P*  herring,   V)  ending,  a — 0  hurting,  M)  resting,  ay  singeing. 

The  character  iq  is  used  after  p,  b  (instead  of  aq,  which 
joins  continuously),  when  a  continuous  joining  precedes:  and 
similarly  aq  instead  of  iq  after  t,  d. 

^  (NOT    </") )  hooping,     \.  (NOT  KJ  )  waiting. 

When  the  uninflected  word  ends  in  one  of  the  characters 
B,  r,  m,  n,  q,  y,  o,  :>  t,  )  d,  the  termination  -ing  is  expressed 
by  the  cross-stroke  (see  §  91).  After  an  o  vowel  the  use  of 
the  cross-stroke  implies  r ;  when  no  r  is  heard,  as  in  sawing, 
the  character  Aq  should  be  used. 
_33_  hurrying,  <-v4\pitying,  — ^  innings,  P longingly,  A\riding. 

C/  cursing,  Nj\ aiming,  ^J.  offering,  ^-^  dyooriq,  during. 

The  characters  iq,  aq,  Aq,  are  very  suitable  as  terminal 
flourishes,  but  do  not  join  well  to  following  signs. 
Short  terminal  inflections  may  be  joined  as  follows ; 

h  singer,      u\  stringy,     V  stingeth,      J  winged,      $  longish. 

In  the  middle  of  a  word,  the  mode  of  hiatus  is  used; 
as  in  G\*_J  kingdom,  Hf-  singsong,  P  longhand. 

But  the  common  compounds  qk,  qg,  qt,  qd,  qjj,  are  written 
with  the  D*  iqo  character ;  the  o-tick  is  omitted,  and  the  following 
character  is  directly  joined  after  the  upstroke  of  the  q;  thus, 

9^  yqko,  inker;  Q_  yqgo,  anger;   f  yqt,  ink'd; 

y*  yq^,  as  in  length;   tf-^  yqd,  as  in  d,  wing'd. 

(W  England,  J?  language,    \f  angry,    D  longer. 
U  \i  ^o  \*L. 

quinquangular,       0y  wrinkle,  cp.  "pf?  functional. 


&4  Foreign  Sounds. 

The  compound  /?  ndj  (soft  ny),  as  in  ^f  d-ndjo,  daityer, 
must  not  be  confused  with  q  or  qg,  as  in  hanger,  anger. 

The  prefixes  in,  un,  before  k,  g,  are  often  assimilated  in 
sound  to  iq,  Aq,  but  are  preferably  written  by  mode  of  hiatus : 
•fCU  inconstant,  ~l(j,  unkind,  jcf  increase. 

90.  FOREIGN  SOUNDS  often  occur  in  short  quotations  and 
isolated  words.    Such  words  should  be  underlined,  or  italicized 
(§  92),  to  distinguish  them  from  English  words;  and  should  be 
expressed  by  as  close  an  imitation  as  possible  in  English 
sounds:  thus,  r\ peur,  J-je,   s~~*>\i  Wien,  ^~*y  Vienne. 

A  few  special  foreign  sounds  have  no  satisfactory  equiva- 
lents in  English.  The  French  u,  or  German  ii,  is  written  ~\  iy, 
followed  by  the  w-mode,  or  the  w  dot.  Compare  the  \vords, 

s~~tfvous,  s~b)Vie,  s~t&vue,  ~^/une,  ^^ —  deux,  ^  trwAO,  trois. 

1  ff 

The  French  nasalized  vowels  are  expressed  by  making  the 
next  character  (q  if  final)  intersect  the  vowel ;  thus, 

rj-pain,  /^Y  bon  (cp.  s~^-j  bonne), cL  comment,  £  long,  tt  lonyue. 

The  character  j  is  used  for  j  in  French  words,  such  as, 
*j  ruwj,  rouge;     d*"   jw&o,joie;    <*—jte9n,jeiine. 

German  ch  is  written  with  the  li  circle,  followed,  before 

a  vowel,  by  the  y-mode,  as  in  r^f  Bach,    /  madchen. 

^ — >°A 

The  '  breathed '  1,  heard  in  Welsh  words,  like  llan,  may  be 
distinguished  by  prefixing  the  h  circle ;  thus,  Jf  Man,  llan. 

91.  INFLECTIONS.     In  adding  inflections  the  outline  of  the 
original  word  should  be  altered  as  little  as  possible. 

With  abbreviated  words  the  mode  of  hiatus  should  be  used. 

//  once,     if  one's,     ia  oneself,    °C  whose,    o/  whom,    o~~  who*1". 
Vy  gives,    {   given,   r\f  -^  <.C  P's  and  Q's,     ty  joys,    l(o  enjoy. 


Inflections.  85 

In  adding  inflections  to  words  ending  in  -pie,  -ble,  -fle,  etc., 
the  character  el  should  not  be  changed  for  ly,  although  the 
syllabic  1  becomes  consonantal  ;  compare  the  words, 


Ccy  couples,  CcJ?  coupling,  w  ample,  A-JL  ampler,  Ad/   amply. 

Similarly  after  an  o  vowel,  the  character  ery  need  not  be 
added  before  a  termination,  such  as  -er,  beginning  with  a 
vowel  [see  §  77,  (2)].  The  mode  of  hiatus  is  used,  or  the 
termination  is  written  above  ;  thus,  /  —  —nearer, 

labourer,     -u-/  utterance,     -^  utter  er,     c\^/  parent. 


A.  word  may  always  be  divided  in  the  middle  and  the  termi- 
nation written  above,  mode  (1),  provided  that  it  does  not  inter- 
fere with  the  expression  of  w  before  vowels  (§  75).  This  is 
especially  convenient  in  the  case  of  terminations  which  tend  to 
go  too  far  below  the  line  ; 

thus,      •£  A  luxury,     IL  vf  logogram,     /K-  M_  recognize. 

The  common  participial  termination  -ing  is  added  by  a  cross- 
stroke  through  the  last  character  of  the  word  ;  the  adverbial 
termination  -ly,  similarly,  by  a  cross-  tick.  These  marks  should 
always  be  used  in  the  case  of  alphabetic  or  abbreviated  words  : 
a  tick  is  added  for  the  plural. 

/^N  being,    ^L>  doings,   <k  thinking,    A^  having,    ji_  airing, 
£  idly,    C  gent(leman)ly,    Jf^*-  prettily,    "^  only,    &  verily. 

This  method  should  not  be  used  for  the  sounds  -ing,  -ly, 
except  when  they  represent  inflections. 

Thus:   s~~v#   (NOT  ^  )  Bingley,    <j  (NOT  -^_)  kingly. 

In  adding  the  s  and  d  inflections  to  words  ending  in  the 
downward  y,  the  character  \  y  is  omitted;  in  similar  cases 
upward  y,  and  o,  are  retained.  Compare  the  words 

r*J^s  pitied,     G-A^/  copied,     -v^>    tittered,    ~^f-  littering. 
rM    pities,       (cvt    copies,         -^7-     utters,      -vr*  utterly. 


86  Punctuation,  etc. 


PUNCTUATION,  ETC. 

92.  STOPS  may  all  be  written  in  the  usual  way;  but  in 
rapid  writing,  punctuation  is  best  effected  by  leaving  spaces. 

A  HYPHEN  between  two  words  is  indicated  by  drawing  a 
line  over  them ;  thus,  C — '  — ji  hard-earned. 

EMPHASIS.  The  clearest  way  to  emphasize  a  word  is  to 
write  it  in  longhand ;  if  the  word  is  written  in  shorthand,  draw 
a  line  round  it,  or  underline  it. 

Italics  are  indicated  by  singly  underlining ;  SMALL  CAPITALS 
by  two  lines;  LAEGE  CAPITALS  by  three.  Foreign  words 
and  quotations,  and  names  of  books  and  periodicals,  are 
generally  italicized. 

To  ERASE  A  WORD,  draw  two  parallel  lines  through  it. 

93.  FIGURES.  The  Arabic  figures  should  be  made  large  and 
distinct;  they  generally  give  no  trouble  unless  badly  written. 

In  writing  round  numbers,  the  abbreviations,  ^_J  j[ow  for 
thousand,  If  mil  for  million,  will  be  found  convenient :  but  it 
is  clearer  and  quicker  to  add  two  noughts  to  a  number  than  to 
abbreviate  the  word  hundred. 

94.  INITIALS  are  marked  as  in  longhand  by  placing  a  dot 
after  them.     The  following  signs  are  used : — 

A.  \.         F.  nt.        K.  \.         0.  ^'        S.   I.          W.  /• 

B.  ^.         G.  C.          L.  J?  P.  o.  T.  vj.  X.    f; 

C.  c.  H.  o.         M.  /.  Q.  c-  U.   J-          Y.  V 

E.  -v          J.  C 

Some,  as  r  r,  represent  the  sound  of  the  name  of  the 
longhand  letter;  others,  as  c  c,  the  sound  with  which  the 
word  usually  begins. 

AN  INITIAL  CAPITAL  is  marked  by  a  short  tick  \  struck 
through  the  first  character  or  written  close  below  it ;  thus, 

Jones,     y   Sykes,    \<l/  West. 


The  exact  spelling  of  a  proper  name,  whether  Smythe  or 
Smith,  Browne  or  Brown,  is  often  important.  Unfamiliar 
proper  names  should  in  this  case  be  written  in  longhand. 


Practice.  87 

PEACTICE. 

95.  The  art  of  shorthand  writing  is  in  the  main  a 
mechanical  art;  to  attain  thorough  excellence  in  it  practice 
alone  is  necessary,  but  practice  is  essential.  Shorthand  is  of 
little  practical  use  until  it  can  be  written  and  read  without 
conscious  effort  and  hesitation.  The  time  required  to  attain 
this  degree  of  proficiency  will  depend  partly  on  the  simplicity 
of  the  system  and  on  the  intelligence  of  the  learner ;  but  no 
amount  of  intelligence  is  of  any  avail  without  diligent  practice. 
At  least  an  hour  a  day  should  be  devoted  to  the  mechanical  act 
of  writing,  till  it  becomes  no  longer  an  effort  but  a  pleasure. 

A  good  method  of  practice  is  the  following :  Take  a  printed 
specimen,  read  it  through  carefully,  referring  to  the  key  if 
necessary ;  then  try  to  write  it  from  the  key  without  referring 
to  the  copy.  Compare  the  result  with  the  copy,  and  rewrite 
several  times  words  incorrectly  written. 

When  sufficient  accuracy  and  facility  have  been  attained  by 
copying  practice,  in  order  to  acquire  speed  the  student  should 
take  every  opportunity  of  practising  from  dictation.  Copying 
practice  is  of  little  use  in  acquiring  speed. 

Practice  in  reading  shorthand  is  just  as  essential  as  practice 
in  writing.  The  student  should  make  a  point  of  reading  every- 
thing he  writes,  not  immediately,  but  after  an  interval  of  a 
week  or  two ;  and  should  not  be  satisfied  till  he  can  read  his 
writing  quite  as  easily  as  longhand  at  any  distance  of  time. 

The  best  kind  of  reading  practice  is  afforded  by  correctly 
printed  specimens  of  unfamiliar  matter.  This  tends  to  improve 
the  style  of  writing,  and  prevents  the  possibility  of  guessing 
words  from  a  reminiscence  of  the  subject. 

With  the  object  of  providing  copious  reading  and  writing 
practice  of  this  kind,  it  is  intended  to  publish  shortly  books  of 
exercises  and  illustrations,  as  well  as  standard  works  printed 
in  the  '  Cursive '  character.  Meanwhile  the  preceding  examples 
and  instructions,  with  the  progressive  exercises  p.  108,  will 
enable  the  student  to  attain  such  certainty  and  ease  in  reading 
and  writing  as  to  make  shorthand,  not  merely  a  pleasant  re- 
creation or  an  idle  accomplishment,  but  a  time-saving  expedient 
of  real  practical  value. 


88  Specimens  of  Writing. 

96.  SPECIMENS  OF  WRITING. 

At  the  outset  of  his  practice,  say  after  reading  §§  38 — 52, 
and  before  proceeding  to  learn  the  rules  for  writing,  the 
student  is  recommended  to  analyse  the  following  easy  example 
with  the  aid  of  the  alphabetic  table.  He  must  expect  to  meet 
with  a  few  points  which  he  cannot  as  yet  fully  appreciate,  but 
he  will  find  that  the  majority  of  the  outlines  present  no 
difficulties.  By  way  of  writing  practice  he  should  take  a  para- 
graph from  a  book  or  newspaper,  picking  out  all  the  alphabetic 
words  and  writing  down  the  characters  that  represent  them. 
He  should  not  attempt  to  write  unfamiliar  words,  till  he  has 
worked  carefully  through  the  whole  of  the  exercises  on  §§  53 — 91, 
and  has  acquired  a  fair  knowledge  of  writing  by  sound  and  of 
the  usage  of  the  various  characters. 

THE   LORD'S   PRAYER. 

The  Lord's  Prayer  is  very  commonly  given  as  an  illustration 
in  systems  of  Shorthand.  The  following  version,  written  in 
the  fullest  style  of  'Cursive',  may  be  compared  with  similar 
versions  in  other  systems. 


7.    OL     Af^-s     s_y    y    — w  ,  J    t*>  f 

.      C      -7      ^f 


r  t 


KEY.     (Line  for  line.)     THE  LORD'S  PRAYER. 

Our  Father  which  art  in  heaven,  hallowed  be  Thy  name. 
Thy  kingdom  come.  Thy  will  be  done  in  earth,  as  it  is  in 
heaven.  Give  us  this  day  our  daily  bread.  And  forgive  us 
our  debts,  as  we  forgive  our  debtors.  And  lead  us  not  into 
temptation,  but  deliver  us  from  evil.  Amen. 

(Capitals  are  not  marked.  The  second  vowel  in  the  word  Amen 
should  have  been  inserted,  since  both  syllables  are  accented.) 


Specimens  of  Writing.  89 


A  BOY'S   COMPOSITION. 


.A  key  of  the  above  in  phonetic  writing*  will  be  found  in 
the  pamphlet  on  Phonetic  Spelling  (p.  27).  The  original  is 
taken  from  English  as  she  is  Taught. 

KEY.  ON   GIRLS. 

Girls  are  very  stuckup  and  dignified  in  their  manner  and 
be  have  your.  They  think  more  of  dress  than  anything  and 
like  to  play  with  dowls  and  rags.  They  cry  if  they  see  a  cow 
in  a  far  distance  and  are  afraid  of  guns.  They  stay  at  home 
all  the  time  and  go  to  church  on  Sunday.  They  are  al-ways 
sick.  They  are  al-ways  funy  and  making  fun  of  boy's  hands 
and  they  say  how  dirty.  They  cant  play  marbles.  I  pity  them 
poor  things.  They  make  fun  of  boys  and  then  turn  round  and 
love  them.  I  don't  beleave  they  ever  killed  a  cat  or  anything. 
They  look  out  every  nite  and  say  oh  ant  the  moon  lovely. 
Thir  is  one  thing  I  have  not  told  and  that  is  they  al-ways  now 
their  lessons  bettern  boys. 

*  The  spelling  of  the  original  has  been  imitated,  here  and  there,  both 
in  the  phonetic  and  shorthand  versions. 


90  Specimens  of  Writing. 

98.       AN  ELEGY  ON  THE  DEATH  OF  A  MAD  DOG. 

1.  Good  people  all  of  every  sort, 

Give  ear  unto  ray  song; 
And  if  you  find  it  wond'rous  short, 
It  cannot  hold  you  long. 

2.  In  Islington  there  was  a  man, 

Of  whom  the  world  might  say, 
That  still  a  godly  race  he  ran, 
Whene'er  he  went  to  pray. 

3.  A  kind  and  gentle  heart  he  had, 

To  comfort  friends  and  foes; 
The  naked  every  day  he  clad, 
When  he  put  on  his  clothes. 

4.  And  in  that  town  a  dog  was  found, 

As  many  dogs  there  be, 
Both  mongrel,  puppy,  whelp,  and  hound, 
And  curs  of  low  degree. 

5.  This  dog  and  man  at  first  were  friends; 

But  when  a  pique  began, 
The  dog,  to  gain  some  private  ends, 
Went  mad  and  bit  the  man. 

6.  Around,  from  all  the  neighb'ring  streets 

The  wond'ring  neighbours  ran, 
And  swore  the  dog  had  lost  his  wits, 
To  bite  so  good  a  man. 

7.  The  wound  it  seem'd  both  sore  and  sad 

To  every  Christian  eye; 
And  while  they  swore  the  dog  was  mad, 
They  swore  the  man  would  die. 

8.  But  soon  a  wonder  came  to  light, 

That  show'd  the  rogues  they  lied, 
The  man  recover'd  of  the  bite, 
The  dog  it  was  that  died. 

Oliver  Goldsmith. 


Specimens  of  Writing. 


91 


(_, 


/ 


fj   0\    r^,    -1     f> 


v^r 


< 


i  V-/T-  r 

Ir 


v_^V 


92  Specimens  of  Writing. 

99.  A  GRABBED  COLLECTION  OF  MONOSYLLABLES.  The  fol- 
lowing passage  *,  or  something  like  it,  was  read  by  Mr  Rundell 
at  a  meeting  in  the  presence  of  several  shorthand  writers  of 
various  systems  : 

"Eyde  wrote  the  rude  reed,  reading  aright  the  ready 
writing.  Wright  wrought  a  rod,  and  hurried  ahead,  at  a  horrid 
rate,  a  harried  rat,  in  a  harrowed  arid  rut,  with  a  rotten  root, 
a  reedy  rood,  on  the  ruddy  Eeading  road,  to  rot  a  ratting  rad 
with  a  written  writ,  re  riding  a  rowdy  raid,  arrayed  in  red,  to 
rout  the  irritating  riot  of  rutting  roes." 

It  is  almost  needless  to  say  that  everyone  was  beaten  by  it, 
except  Professor  Everett,  "who  took  it  down  at  a  very  decent 
speed,  and  read  it  accurately,  not  knowing  the  meaning  of  it." 
Such  passages  present  no  difficulties  in  Cursive  Shorthand. 
The  following  is  the  complete  version  of  the  above  : 


1 

This  can  be  written  by  a  skilled  hand  in  about  half  a  minute 
(that  is  to  say  almost  as  fast  as  the  words  themselves  can  be 
distinctly  articulated);  and  at  the  same  time  so  clearly  that 
anyone  who  knew  the  system,  could  read  it  correctly  at  sight 
without  having  ever  heard  the  original. 

A  version  of  the  same  in  Pitman's  Phonography,  is  given  as 
an  illustration  of  the  use  of  detached  vowels,  on  p.  13. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  outlines  in  the  Pitman  version  are 
nearly  all  alike,  but  for  the  presence  of  certain  little  dots  and 
ticks,  which  look  very  neat  and  harmless,  but  which  are  most 
annoying  in  practice  ;  in  reading,  because  they  are  so  incon- 
spicuous and  indistinct  ;  in  writing,  because  it  takes  so  long  to 
insert  them  with  the  care  and  accuracy  necessary  to  distinguish 
the  words  correctly. 

*  I  have  since  discovered  that  the  original  passage,  as  read  by 
Mr  Bnndell,  was  less  elaborate. 


Met/tods  of  Abbreviation.  93 

METHODS   OF  ABBEEVIATION. 

100.  Cursive  Shorthand  is  about  three  times  as  brief  as 
longhand,  and  can  be  written  in  full,  by  persons  of  average 
skill,  at  the  rate  of  between  80  and  100  words  a  minute,  without 
any  of  the  outlines  being  spoilt.  Higher  rates  of  speed  are  best 
attained,  not  by  more  hurried  scribbling,  but  by  methods  of 
abbreviation. 

In  reporting,  abbreviation  by  omission  must  be  employed  to 
a  large  extent  in  any  system.  The  manner  and  degree  of  ab- 
breviation must  always  depend  largely  on  individual  discretion 
and  on  special  circumstances.  It  is  impossible  to  give  hard 
and  fast  rules  to  meet  all  cases.  The  subject  will  be  more 
fully  developed  in  a  subsequent  work :  meanwhile  a  few  general 
principles  and  illustrations  are  appended,  which  will  enable 
the  intelligent  student  to  attain  considerable  brevity  and  speed 
with  very  little  loss  of  legibility. 

Words  are,  in  general,  best  abbreviated,  as  in  longhand,  by 
omitting  the  terminal  portions.  The  full  expression  of  vowels 
in  the  outlines,  enables  us  to  employ  this  simple  method  of 
abbreviation  to  a  far  greater  extent  in  Cursive  than  is  possible 
in  most  other  systems. 

A  single  comprehensive  method,  like  this,  is  much  more 
useful  in  practice  than  a  long  list  of  special  contractions. 

A  word  thus  abbreviated  is  marked,  as  in  longhand,  by 
a  dot  at  the  end.  The  last  character  or  two  may  be  written 
over  the  dot,  thus,  f^^~^  advcmfa<7eous,  if  required  to  show 
the  part  of  speech  or  the  inflection :  in  this  case  the  dot  may 
generally  be  omitted,  especially  if  the  word  is  obviously  an 
abbreviation. 

The  best  words  to  abbreviate  in  this  way  are  long  words  in 
which  the  first  syllable  or  two  suffices  to  show  the  meaning; 
as  in  the  following  examples,  in  which  the  portions  to  be 
omitted  are  italicized ; 

antagonist,  baptism,  benevolent,  ecclesiastical,  extravagant, 
manufacturing,  plenipotentiary,  philanthropic,  unaniwioits. 

c.  7 


94  Methods  of  Abbreviation. 

If  a  long  word  occurs  several  times  in  the  same  passage,  it 
should  be  written  in  full  the  first  time  (unless  it  is  a  common 
word),  but  may  generally  be  abbreviated  with  safety  on  each 
subsequent  repetition.  Initials  may  be  used,  as  in  longhand, 
for  words  or  names  that  are  constantly  recurring. 

The  method  may  be  applied  even  to  monosyllables,  especially 
if  the  shortened  outline  could  not  stand  for  any  other  English 
word.  This  restriction  need  not  be  observed  in  the  case  of 
very  common  words  when  the  sense  is  obvious: 

r**' point,  K»  time,  J^  life,  \  came,  V^  g&ve,  nil  friend. 
It  is  especially  advantageous  to  omit  long,  common,  or 
meaningless  terminations,  such  as  -ful,  -able;  more  particularly 
such  as  if  written  would  be  separated  from  the  rest  of  the 
outline  by  the  mode  of  hiatus.  The  dot  may  be  placed  above 
or  below  to  indicate  w  or  y;  thus, 

rv'  valua&Ze  (§75),  <3O  consequent,  OC.  consecutive  [§  77,  (1)]. 
A  substantival  termination  may  be  indicated  by  a  small 
circle  disjoined,  when  it  does  not  clash  with  the  suffix  'self. 
An  adverbial  termination  is  indicated  by  a  double  dot ;  thus, 
n£  thankfulness*,     H:  satisfactorily,      /f):  especially. 

The  following  adverbs,  and  the  corresponding  adjectives, 
etc.,  may  be  conveniently  abbreviated  as  shown  by  the  italics : 
absolutely,  characteristically,  essentially,  extraordinarily, 
generally,  immediately,  originally,  particularly,  practically, 
probably,  publicly,  respectively,  severally,  sufficient?!/. 
Unless  the  termination  is  very  long  it  should  be  written 

in  full.     The  termination  of   the  word    a    consciously,   for 

o% 
instance,  can  be  written  nearly  as  fast  as  the  double  dot,  but 

it  is  worth  while  to  abbreviate  Q  /  koncyencosly,  conscientiously, 
oo^t 

provided  that  the  meaning  is  otherwise  clear. 

Abbreviations  familiar  in  longhand  may  be  safely  used  as 
a  rule  in  shorthand :  for  instance, 

Magazine,  advt  (advertisement),  Govt  (government) ,  examination, 
ppose  (purpose), amt(amount),abt  (about),  Mona"ar/,Februan/,etc. 
*  It  should  not,  of  course,  be  used  for  the  negative  termination  -lessness. 


Methods  of  Abbreviation. 


95 


The  following  are  particularly  common  and  convenient: 

/-  Mr,  l-f  Messrs,   //  M",   It  Miss,  In  Misses,  ^^~  DT, 

>-&  Reverend,    A_^  Ld.  (Lord),     ~l"  honourable,    n   member. 

The  common  termination  -nee  may  be  indicated,  as  in 
longhand,  by  s  -ce,  written  above ;  thus, 

\_s'  difference,     A~x~b  advance,  cp.  /N. — "~s>  advantages. 

101.  SPECIAL  ABBREVIATIONS.  A  prefix  or  initial  syllable 
which  is  common  to  several  words,  does  not  make  a  clear 
abbreviation  unless  its  use  is  restricted  by  special  convention 
to  some  particular  word,  preferably  the  commonest  word  con- 
taining it.  The  most  suitable  word  in  each  case  will  depend 
on  the  kind  of  work  in  which  the  writer  is  employed:  the 
following  will  be  found  of  general  utility,  and  may  be  taken  as 
typical  examples : 


advantage, 

P  Christian,      < 

r^  objects, 

\    signify, 

0 

advt, 

£.  character, 

rr^)  6b;ects, 

ey    opinion, 

d  ifferent, 

U-  strength,       a 

L-\  subject, 

/^~'  aw/ttl, 

difficult, 

Q-  principal,     * 

-b  several, 

n    speafc, 

defendant, 

rl/  plaintiff,     r, 

-x  public, 

(7  Engiisn. 

general,          Jf   religion, 


language, 


/N, 


It  is  a  common  device  to  omit  the  middle  of  a  word  and 
join  the  termination  directly  to  the  prefix.  This  method  must 
be  used  with  great  caution,  and  can  only  be  applied  safely  to 
known  cases  which  do  not  clash  with  unabbreviated  words: 
such  as, 
?y  acknowledge,  if  influence,  O  notwit/tstanding, 

C>WN  opportunity,        (JJ    interest,        //->^  nevertheless, 


a\j?  consideration,     c°    question,        <V~O    publication, 
a/    constitution,        £)     in/orntation,      C     generation. 


7—2 


96  Methods  of  Abbreviation. 

There  is  no  limit  to  the  number  of  logograms  that  may 
be  formed  on  this  plan.  They  are  useful  for  reporting,  but 
should  be  avoided  in  ordinary  writing. 

102.  THE  CONVERSATIONAL  PRONUNCIATION,  provided  that 
it  is  sufficiently  full  to  be  intelligible,  may  always  be  followed 
in  abbreviating  words,  whenever  it  gives  a  clearer  and  easier 
outline.  This  method  is  particularly  useful  in  the  formation 
of  phrases.  In  conversation,  if  a  consonant  ends  one  word 
and  begins  the  next  and  no  pause  is  made  between  the  two,  the 
articulation  is  not  repeated  in  speech,  but  one  is  made  to  do 
double  duty.  In  such  cases  the  consonant  need  not  be  repeated 
in  shorthand.  Examples  of  conversational  pronunciation : 

fr      some  more,     /'~vx~x  ought  to  be,    l^^^  must  be, 
^cannot,  /^7more'n(moret^fln),  '"~v-'7  better'n (better tJian), 
Lt  as  soon  as,     j/7  as  long  as,      AT  as  far  as,    i^f  so  as. 

With  respect  to  the  omission  of  vowels  the  student  is  re- 
ferred to  the  remarks  in  §  65.  The  strict  rules  for  vowel  inser- 
tion should  always  be  followed  in  the  case  of  rare  words,  and, 
if  such  words  are  to  be  abbreviated,  they  should  be  abbreviated 
in  the  regular  way. 

Consonants  may  be  omitted,  as  in  metrical  writing,  in  the 
words  e'er,  e'en,  o'er,  and  in  similar  cases. 

When  several  consonants  come  together  in  a  single  syllable 
one  of  them  may  sometimes  be  omitted  without  much  loss. 
The  prefixes  trans-  and  self-  may  be  written  tras-  and  sef- 
respectively.  L  and  r,  when  combined  with  other  consonants, 
may  occasionally  be  omitted  in  unaccented  syllables  and  in 
very  common  words,  as  in  children,  public,  application,  interest, 
instruction,  contradict,  fulfil.  A  common  prefix  may  sometimes 
be  omitted  if  the  word  is  clear  without  it;  thus  con  and  com 
may  be  omitted  in  the  words,  completion,  cojwbustion,  communi- 
cate, comparative,  conclude,  confident,  conscious,  and  some 
others.  These  methods  must  however  be  used  with  great 
caution,  and  are  not  recommended  to  beginners.  Examples  are, 

*V?  self-respect ;  &•  instruction ;  M«  transact ;  />eu  completion. 
u  0  v  J 


Methods  of  Abbreviation.  97 

103.  OMISSION  OF  CONNECTING  WOBDS.  In  note-taking,  as  in 
telegraphic  despatches,  when  the  sense  is  more  important  than 
the  actual  words  in  which  it  is  expressed,  connecting  words 
and  phrases  may  be  very  freely  omitted.  If  the  leading  words 
and  ideas  are  skilfully  selected  and  noted  down  in  their  proper 
order,  the  connecting  links  may  be  readily  supplied  afterwards. 
It  is  better  to  omit  a  few  unimportant  words,  and  to  write 
the  leading  words  clearly,  than  to  abbreviate  them  in  such 
a  way  as  to  render  all  alike  indistinct.  As  Mr  T.  A.  Beed 
remarks:  "  Misreadings  are  quite  as  likely  to  arise  from  out- 
lines closely  resembling  one  another  not  being  kept  sufficiently 
distinct,  as  from  the  noninsertion  of  words". 

Skill  in  the  application  of  this  method  can  only  be  acquired 
by  practice  in  note-taking.  Those  who  have  been  accustomed 
to  taking  notes  in  longhand,  will  find  no  difficulty  in  applying 
it  to  shorthand. 

An  omission  of  several  words  is  marked,  as  in  longhand,  by 
a  series  of  dots.  The  number  of  dots  in  a  short  omission,  may 
be  the  same  as  the  number  of  words  omitted. 

If  a  phrase  is  repeated  several  times  in  the  same  passage, 
the  first  word  or  letter  only  should  be  written  at  each  repetition, 
followed  by  a  long  dash,  to  which,  for  greater  clearness,  the 
termination  of  the  phrase  may  be  attached,  if  desired.  Common 
and  familiar  phrases  may  be  treated  in  a  similar  way. 

ILLUSTRATING  TREATMENT  OF  REPEATED  PHBASES. 


^->  ' 


St  Matth.  v.  2—10. 


98  Phraseography. 


PHRASEOGRAPHY. 

104.  Time  is  often  saved  by  writing  whole  phrases,  like 
single  words,  without  lifting  the  pen  except  as  required  for  the 
'mode  of  hiatus'. 

Initial  and  final  short  vowels  may  be  frequently  indicated 
in  this  way,  by  joining  the  consonants;  and  initial  w  and  y 
may  be  expressed  by  mode  instead  of  being  written. 

A  reckless  use  of  phraseography,  however,  is  strongly  to  be 
condemned.  Only  such  words  as  are  closely  connected  in 
sense  may  be  joined  together;  and  the  conditions  of  correct 
vowel  indication,  of  facility  and  lineality,  should  be  satisfied. 
The  conversational  pronunciation  may  generally  be  followed; 
but  it  is  desirable  that  the  outline  of  each  component  word 
should  remain  unaltered,  so  as  to  be  separately  distinguishable. 
The  following  are  a  few  typical  examples : 


I  cannot 


X  ' 


shan't 


>e 


you  do  not 

we'll  not 
you  are  not 


it  is  not 


I  am  not 


I've  a 


in  part 
in  all  that  is 
so  that  it  is 
by  that 
there  is 


v  —  J^^.  they  are 

should  have 


my  dear  sir 


The  alphabetic  words  are  so  familiar,  that  exceptions 
to  the  strict  rules  of  vowel  indication  may  be  made  in  the  case 
of  very  common  and  useful  phrases  containing  them,  provided 
that  the  joinings  are  easy,  and  that  the  resulting  outline  can- 
not clash  with  any  English  word.  Such  as  are  fully  expressed 
may  be  freely  joined;  but  the  words,  and,  of,  the,  from,  very, 
think,  them,  give,  can  only  be  joined  in  special  cases. 


Ph  raseography. 


99 


(1)     PHRASES  CONTAINING  a,  and,  of,  the,  for,  to,  ETC.    The 

o-tick  may  be  used  for  a,  and  either  of  the  e-ticks  for  the,  after 

alphabetic  words,  and  at  the  ends  of  several  common  phrases; 

v  and  the 

/~"v  by  a 

/-v  by  the 

<*/~\  to  be 

A  of  the 

<-/-  to  a 

WN  to  the 

v>  /  to  do 

v\  and  of  the 

^    in  a 

-7    on  the 

^s~d  to  have 

v  and  are 

L    as  a 

vs  from  the 

C     to  give 

±   and  is 

eX   with  a 

o^  with  the 

C     forgive 

/   is  as 

o_   up  a 

Of  have  the 

(j     unto 

f    as  is 

nr-  for  a 

nf  for  the 

(j     undo 

^A  with  a  view  to  the,      9|  with  regard  to  the, 

/T~>-  for  ever,     rt~*v*-J  forbid,     (v  forget,  cp.  n\^   forego. 


"""Sk     we  have  had 
we  shall  have 


(2)     ACXILIABY  PHRASEP. 
/-^s    would  be 
^      will  be 

it  has  been 

let  us  be 

should  be 


may  have 
may  be 
ought  to  be 


(3)    NEGATIVE  PHBASES.     The  negative  in  auxiliary  phrases 
may  often  be  implied  by  INTERSECTION. 


>•£,     cannot  have 
should  not  do 


may  not  be 
had  not  been 


100 


Phraseography. 


(4)     MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES 
as  if  it  were 
as  it  is 
d'you  think 
"^       I  think  I  was 
to  think  that 


I  wish  to  be 

I  shall  be 
able  to  do  that 

in  order  to  do  so 
everybody 

Many  other  phrases  may  be  formed  on  similar  analogies. 
Short  phrases  may  be  directly  derived  from  longer  ones :  from 
the  phrase  in  all  that  is  may  be  derived  the  useful  phrases 
in  all,  all  that,  that  is,  all  that  is,  in  all  that.  On  the  analogy 
of  by  that,  we  may  write  by  this,  by  tliese,  by  tliose,  by  their,  etc.; 
on  the  analogy  of  would  be,  we  may  form  can  be,  could  be, 
might  be,  had  been,  would  have,  could  have,  etc. 

In  phrase-forming,  the  conversational  pronunciation  may 
always  be  followed  (§  102).  Connecting  words,  such  as  and,  or, 
of,  the,  etc.,  may  be  freely  omitted  in  common  phrases;  but  if 
the  remaining  words  are  abbreviated,  it  is  generally  better, 
instead  of  joining  them,  merely  to  write  them  closer  together 
so  as  to  show  their  connection. 

Phrases  beginning  with  words,  such  as  that,  with,  whose 
outlines  are  characteristic,  are  particularly  to  be  recommended, 
because  they  are  at  once  recognized  as  phrases,  and  cannot 
possibly  be  mistaken  for  words. 

An  important  use  of  phraseography  is  to  indicate  the 
connection  of  words.  By  joining  together  in  phrases  only 
words  that  are  closely  connected  in  sense,  we  may  not  only 
save  time,  but  also  secure  greater  legibility. 

The  student  should  exercise  the  greatest  caution  at  the 
outset  in  his  use  of  phraseography:  he  must  remember  that 
abbreviated  words  cannot  be  freely  joined  without  danger  of 
clashing ;  that  time  is  not  saved  by  joining  words  which  join 
awkwardly  or  indistinctly ;  that  phrases  which  are  so  long  that 
they  cannot  be  written  easily  without  shifting  the  hand,  can  be 
written  more  clearly  and  quickly  if  divided;  and  that  only  very 
common  phrases  are  likely  to  become  sufficiently  familiar  for 
fluent  writing  and  reading. 


Characteristics  of  the  Age.  101 


IN  ABBBEVIATED  STYLE  WITH  PHBASEOGBAPHY. 


KEY. 

CHAEACTEBISTICS  OF  THE  AGE.  —  The  peculiar  and  distinguishing 
characteristics  of  the  present  age  are  in  every  respect  remarkable.  Un- 
questionably an  extraordinary  and  universal  change  has  commenced 
in  the  internal  as  well  as  the  external  world,  —  in  the  mind  of  man 
as  well  as  in  the  habits  of  society,  the  one  indeed  being  the  necessary 
consequence  of  the  other.  A  rational  consideration  of  the  circumstances 
in  which  mankind  are  at  present  placed,  must  show  us  that  influences 
of  the  most  important  and  wonderful  character  have  been  and  are 
operating  in  such  a  manner  as  to  bring  about  if  not  a  reformation,  a 
thorough  revolution  in  the  organization  of  society.  Never  in  the  history 
of  the  world  have  benevolent  and  philanthropic  institutions  for  the 
relief  of  domestic  and.  public  affliction;  societies  for  the  promotion  of 
manufacturing,  commercial  and  agricultural  interests;  associations 
for  the  instruction  of  the  masses,  the  advancement  of  literature  and 
science,  the  development  of  true  political  principles;  for  the  extension 
in  short  of  every  description  of  knowledge,  and  the  bringing  about  of 
every  kind  of  reform,  been  so  numerous  so  efficient  and  so  indefatigable 
in  their  operation  as  at  the  present  day.  We  do  not  say  that  many 
of  the  objects  sought  by  these  associations,  are  not  extravagant  and 
impracticable,  but  we  do  say  that  it  is  impossible  that  such  influences 
can  exist  without  advancing  in  some  degree  the  interests  of  humanity. 
It  would  be  idle  to  deny  that  notwithstanding  all  these  beneficial  in- 
fluences, a  great  amount  of  misery  exists;  but  it  is  only  the  natural 
consequence  of  great  and  sudden  changes.  Let  us  hope  that  in  this 
instance  at  least  it  may  be  but  the  indispensable  preliminary  stage 
in  the  cure  of  a  deep  seated  disease. 


102  Comparison  with  Pitman. 

105.  COMPARISON  WITH  PITMAN.  The  subject  of  the  fore- 
going specimen  is  taken  from  a  tract  entitled,  A  Persuasive  to 
the  Study  of  Phonography  (Pitman's),  where  it  is  given  in  the 
briefest  reporting  style.  It  is  also  the  first  example  given  in 
Pitman's  Reporter.  We  may  reasonably  assume  that  it  re- 
presents his  system  at  its  best,  and  that  it  is  a  fair  subject  for 
our  comparison. 

The  Cursive  version  given  on  the  preceding  page  is  NOT 
written  in  the  briefest  possible  style*.  None  of  the  words  are 
omitted,  and  many  of  them  might  be  much  further  abbreviated 
in  practice,  owing  to  the  accurate  expression  of  vowels  in  the 
outlines.  It  is  quite  brief  enough  however  for  ordinary  re- 
porting, and  we  therefore  propose  to  take  it  as  it  stands. 

It  is  much  more  fully  and  clearly  written  than  the  Pitman 
version.  The  number  of  sound-elements,  vowels  and  con- 
sonants, actually  expressed  (leaving  out  of  account,  for  the 
present,  the  indication  of  vowel  places  and  of  accentuation),  is 
only  about  15  °/0  greater  in  the  Cursive  than  in  the  Pitman ; 
but  whereas  in  the  former  they  are  nearly  all  simply  and 
definitely  rendered  by  their  alphabetic  characters,  in  the  latter 
nearly  half  (upwards  of  40  %)  are  more  or  less  uncertainly 
implied  by  methods  of  abbreviation. 

Not  only  is  the  actual  number  of  sounds  expressed  In  the 
Cursive  larger,  and  the  mode  of  expressing  them  simpler  and 
clearer ;  but  the  selection  of  the  sounds  is  also  more  rational ; 
those  sounds  being  chosen,  whether  vowels  or  consonants, 
which  are  most  useful  for  the  recognition  and  distinction  of 
the  wordsi 

More  than  one  hundred  and  twenty  of  the  most  important 
vowels  are  written  by  joined  characters  according  to  rule. 
Besides  this,  the  exact  places  of  about  one  hundred  and  fifty 
others  are  indicated,  the  quality  as  well  as  the  place  of  the 
vowel  is  generally  shown,  and  the  absence  of  vowels  in  all 
other  cases  is  correctly  f  implied.  The  meaning  of  every  out- 

*  The  plate  was  executed  a  whole  month  hefore  the  idea  of  making 
the  comparison  was  entertained. 

t  Except  in  one  or  two  very  obvions  phrases,  snch  as  hare  been. 


Comparison  toith  Pitman.  103 

line  is  thus  rendered  so  definite  that  guess-work  is  practically 
eliminated. 

The  illegibility  of  the  Pitman  version  is  largely  due  to 
its  disproportionate  deficiency  in  the  expression  of  vowels. 
Only  ten  vowels  are  inserted  in  the  whole  passage.  There 
is  scarcely  any  attempt  at  vowel  indication.  The  downward  r, 
indicating  the  absence  cf  a  vowel  after  it,  is  only  used  four 
times,  out  of  twenty-two  cases  in  which  it  is  theoretically 
required.  The  loop  for  the  compound  st  is  only  used  five 
times  out  of  twenty.  The  hooks  for  the  I  and  r  compounds  are* 
used  as  often  as  not  (22  times  out  of  45)  when  vowels  inter- 
vene. Even  when  carefully  engraved,  the  Pitman  is,  therefore, 
far  from  legible.  When  written  at  a  moderate  speed,  many  of 
its  essential  refinements*  of  length,  thickness,  and  position, 
are  lost  or  obscured,  and  in  hurried  writing  it  often  becomes 
quite  undecipherable. 

Cursive  on  the  other  hand  is  not  one  quarter  t  aa  delicate. 
The  outlines,  being  almost  entirely  on  the  longhand  slope, 
have  an  easy  flow,  and  can  be  recklessly  scribbled  with  little  or 
no  loss  of  legibility.  Thus,  although  the  Pitman,  being  much 
less  fully  written,  is  about  25  °/0£  briefer  to  the  eye,  the  Cursive 
is  so  much  easier  to  the  hand,  and  involves  so  much  less 
mental  effort,  that,  given  equal  skill,  it  can  be  written  in 
the  same  time,  not  only  with  far  fewer  mistakes,  but  with 
incomparably  superior  legibility. 

"  In  this  connection,  the  remarks  of  the  ablest  practical  exponent  of 
Phonography,  Mr  T.  A.  Reed,  are  interesting  and  instructive.  In  criticis- 
ing a  briefer  system  than  Pitman's,  he  says:  "This  [the  counting  of 
inflections]  is  by  no  means  a  conclusive  test.  There  are  inflections  and 
inflections.  Twenty  easy  inflections  may  be  written  more  rapidly  than  a 
dozen  difficult  ones  with  awkward  joinings.  ...The  easy  flaw  of  a  system 
is  one  of  its  most  important  practical  elements.. ..Greater  precision  is 
needed  in  regard  to  the  size  and  slope  of  the  letters.... These  peculiarities 
are  necessarily  unfavourable  to  speed  and  ease  in  writing,  and  greatly 
detract  from  the  value  of  the  system  to  the  professional  shorthand 
writer,  to  whom  all  undue  niceties  and  refinements  are  a  thorn  in  the 
flesh  ".  See  also  Introduction,  pp.  3,  4,  C,  etc. 

t  See  Introduction,  p.  4,  near  end. 

t  Estimated  by  Prof.  Everett's  rule,  Introduction,  p.  6. 


104  Facsimile  of  Writing. 

106.    FACSIMILE  OF  ORDINARY  WRITING  (NATURAL  SIZE). 
vo     3  \   V  <o  O^6  ^    G*>  A  ^-    /""*    /-^   v   **<,  -7 


KEY. 


There  are  three  ways  in  which  the  conditions  or  character- 
istics of  the  time  may  be  said  to  affect  us.  They  modify 
belief,  they  modify  society,  and  they  modify  the  private  personal 
life  of  every  one  of  us.  The  preacher  who  stands  forth  at  the 
present  time  as  the  ambassador  of  Christ,  cannot,  I  think,  use 
the  same  confident  language  he  would  have  used  some  fifty 
years  ago.  I  do  not  mean  that  he  ought  to  do  less,  or  would 
do  less,  for  the  cause  of  Christ's  religion,  but,  if  I  may  put  the 
case  as  it  appears  to  my  own  mind,  it  is  that  if  he  be  honest 
with  himself  and  the  congregation  to  which  he  speaks,  he  will 
not  venture  to  say,  "This  is  true:  there  is  no  sort  of  doubt 
about  it  ;  it  is  what  I  believe,  and  what  you  are-  all  bound  to 
believe".  But  let  him  rather  say  —  at  least  it  is  what  I  would 
rather  say  to  you  —  my  belief  is  inexpressibly  dear  to  my  own 
soul  :  it  is  the  one  thing  which  arms  me  against  temptation, 
and  illumines  my  path,  and  makes  life  for  me  worth  living. 
And  as  that  is  my  intimate  experience,  is  it  not  right  and 
naturally  inevitable  that  I  should  deeply  and  dearly  desire  it  to 
be  yours  ? 


Marginal  Notes.  105 


107.  MARGINAL  NOTES.  Cursive  can  be  written  in  a  small 
space  much  more  clearly  than  longhand.  The  following  is 
a  facsimile  (natural  size)  of  a  marginal  note  written  with  fine 
glass  stylograph.  The  text  is  that  of  the  discussion  on 
shorthand  systems  in  The  Bazaar*,  1882 — 83. 

FAIR  FIDDLERS.  ^^^-^ 

"Starting  from  the  premises  that  centuries  of  irfsr^j, ' 
subordination  have  left  the  gentler  sex  too  gentle  >-/V«  n fyfy.i  •/•  fy 
to  compete  on  equal  terms  with  man,  a  musical  nCf***-^/  ~!*f 
casuist  might  possibly  argue  that  woman,  having  i"^:"^/  ^-  */ 
played  second  fiddle  from  the  Creation,  can  never 
make  a  first-class  violinist.  Such  reasoning,  at 
all  events,  would  be  quite  as  logical  as  much  of 
that  which  has  been  put  forward  in  opposition  to  •*-><  ~  ^-)  jnto*, 
violin  teaching  to  girls;  and  although,  of  late,  ^jw-cp  •*  f^ 
there  has  been  something  of  a  turn  in  the  tide  of  ,  g  v,  4,r^.*~, 

The  above  specimen  is  written  in  the  ordinary  unabbreviated 
style;  there  would  be  no  difficulty  in  writing  it  much  more 
briefly  and  minutely  if  desired.  The  process  by  which  the 
block  was  produced  has  perhaps  hardly  done  justice  to  the 
original.  Some  of  the  outlines  are  a  little  spoilt;  though  not 
enough  to  render  any  of  the  words  uncertain. 

The  student  should  not  endeavour  to  write  too  briefly  or 
minutely  at  the  outset.  To  abbreviate  clearly  requires  consider- 
able experience.  He  should  be  content,  for  some  time,  to 
practise  a  full  and  unabbreviated  style,  dividing  nearly  all  the 
words.  From  the  first  he  should  use  all  the  special  outlines  for 
common  words  contained  in  the  list  on  the  next  page,  but  should 
at  first  confine  himself  strictly  to  that  list,  writing  all  other 
words  in  full.  In  his  early  practice  of  phraseography  he  should 
observe  the  rules  of  vowel  indication  very  carefully.  As  he 
progresses  and  acquires  greater  facility  and  precision  in  the 
application  of  the  rules,  he  may  gradually  adopt  all  the  abbre- 
viations and  phrases  contained  in  the  illustrations  and  exercises, 
and  may  proceed  to  form  others  on  analogous  principles ;  but 
it  is  essential  that  he  should  be  able  to  write  any  word  correctly 
in  full  without  hesitation,  before  he  attempts  to  make  abbrevi- 
ations for  himself. 

*  A  book  of  selections  from  this  controversy,  with  illustrative  cuts, 
edited  by  T.  Anderson,  under  the  title  of  Shorthand  Systems,  is  pub- 
lished by  L.  Upcott  Gill,  170,  Strand,  W.C. 


106  Alphabetic  List  of  Common   Words. 


108.     ALPHABETIC  LIST  OF  COMMON  WOKDS.    The  following 

outlines  illustrate  chiefly  the  indication  of  vowels  in  common 

words,  §§  65,  73.     The  sounds  omitted  in  each  word  are  itali- 

cized.    The  beginner  should  pay  special  attention  to  the  ten 

words  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*),  because  their  forms,  though 

easily  remembered,  are  more  or  less  arbitrary,  and  may  other- 

wise give  him  trouble  in  reading,  the  first  time  he  meets  them. 

The  Alphabetic  Words  are  not  included  in  this  list. 

The  numbers  after  each  word  refer  to  the  sections  explain- 

ing the  points  which  it  illustrates. 

V-N^  about     65.  70 

5     can't            65 
(t 

L  gentleman  100 

V^~b  above   70.  73 

c    cause            65 

r 

Of  glory    86.  100 

according     65 

fa  change  65.  84 

U 

(     gone              73 

^  after       65.  81 

e    charge          65 

/ 

G     again     65.  70 

dis  child      65.  86 

C    great      54.  65 

G     against  65.  70 

gA     combine       65 

62,    ha£f        55.  65 

I 

<°    his  *      48.  55 

/    among    70.  87 

a    come      73.  87 

T 

AJ    amount  65.  87 

C.    could*    73.  81 

c-^  high      55.  61 
~^—  however  102 

(l  anger     79.  89 

x_^/did         48.  73 
W  does       48.  73 

if*-/  indeed    65.  70 

sly  arrange  65.  70 

Q    ink         70.  8'J 

UJ 

•^i  done       48.  73 

7 

s-~\  because        65 

/ 

y-    ink'd      70.  80 

r 

x>    each*           84 

/ 

^~)  been       48.  65 

/ 

r   enough         73 

C    Join        77(!) 

^~va  before 

• 

/ 

s~\<1  /behind  65.  75 

v~t>  every    70.  100 

C     judge            73 

V 

C 

s-^L  between*     65 

r     except    73.  81 

/ 

*? 

C    jury        65.86 

X-N^  body         73 

^>i    find               65 

0 

^-N,  but               73 

d  form  64.  77(1) 

^    just              73 

(ft  call                65 

C  general         73 

<j,    kind             65 

Alphabetic  List  of  Common  Words.          107 


/Ox  lady             65 

tr   not                73 

If    state            65 

P    land             73 

w   nothing        73 

if    still             73 

/C    late              65 

\_9-  other            73 

d     such*    73.  84 

Jr^_    laughter      65 

rrJr  people          65 

xJ,    than      73.  79 
7 

P    length   73.  89 

~$   perfect  54.  65 

•^~f>  then            73 

/ 
/   long       73.  89 

f^-j  pu;-pose       65 
a-    ^feasure  *     84 

(jfM  thanking     89 

J(_^  lord              65 

/ 

o<6  proof           65 

VJL/  that             73 

A     maintain 

~    put              73 

^jz>  themseZye*-  48 

/ 
/    man       73.  87 

Q     quite            81 

S^  these      65.  83 

/ 
'    /     manner  73.  88 

/     many     48.  73 

S~   Tc&ther        100 
>v_/  read       77  (1) 
.b    right             81 

^_/>  this        73.  83 
V    thing     73.  89 
va^    thought  48.  65 

/     mmd           65 

U 
Jf    shaU      55.  73 

Jf    till                73 

/     month  49.  73 

P    shan't    55.  65 

7"   w;as             56 

f        moreover  100 

<*.    she  *             55 

n     went             56 

/"•>>    move           65 

a/    short            65 

/7     whence        56 

I     much*  73.84 

1.^   should  55.  73 

/^_?-  zc/jether       56 

/name           65 

//     same            65 

o//V_  whosoever 

//^"~*>  native          65 

4)    somewhat    73 

,e     wUt       48.  86 

&      nature   65.  84 

n^~   sometij/tt's  100 

^    withowt*      81 

fs 

K\    neither         81 

//,    something  87 

)     would*  56.  81 

ts~*-  never           73 

J 

n^    spirit      73.  86 

>    young    57.  73 

w    none       73.  88 

</     stage            65 

*f  your      57.  62 

108  Progressive   Writing  Exercises. 

PKOGEESSIVE   WEITING  EXEECISES. 

The  Outlines  of  words  printed  in  italics  are  to  be  found  in 
the  previous  pages.  The  numbers  refer  to  the  sections. 

I.    ALPHABETIC  WORDS  IN  ALPHABETIC  ORDER  (see  §  48). 

'  A,  air,  an,  and,  are,  as,  at,  Ay,  be,  circumstance,  do,  first, 
for,  from,  give,  had,  hand,  has,  hath,  have,  him,  his,  how,  I,  in, 
into,  is,  joy,  key,  loo,  me,  no,  of,  one,  or,  owe,  pea,  self,  selves, 
such,  the,  them,  think,  to,  very,  way,  we,  which,  who,  will, 
with,  year,  you. 

n.    JOINED  CHARACTERS;  LONG  VOWELS  AND  CONSONANTS  (§54). 

Sharp  Angle  Joinings: — eo,  irk,  sir,  spur,  search,  urge,  oo, 
pore,  bore,  lore,  more,  sore,  pork.  AO,  ark,  arch,  pa,  mar,  bar, 
lark,  Sark.  ow,  out  81,  (h)ouse.  AW,  oak,  own,  owing,  low, 
so,  soak,  mow.  ey,  ache  (k),  age,  aitch.  oy,  boy,  loin,  point. 

Angles  sharpened: — ow,  bough,  sow,  mouth.  AW,  oath,  ode, 
oat,  Po,  beau,  ey,  ape,  ace,  day  54,  say.  oo,  core,  gore,  corn, 
gaunt,  gorse,  course.  AO,  car,  gar,  aunt.  (See  also  Exercise 
VIII.) 

Angles  slurred: — eo,  learn,  earth  81,  earn,  stir,  oo,  order  54, 
ought  81.  AO,  art.  ow,  owl,  down,  loud,  now  88.  AW,  toe  54, 
dough,  know  88.  ey,  nay  88,  ail,  lay,  ray,  may,  main,  oy,  oil. 

Continuous  Joinings:— eo,  cur  54,  girl  97,  earl,  oo,  all, 
nor  88,  tore,  door,  roar.  AO,  tar.  ow,  cow  54,  gown,  row. 
AW,  coat  54,  go,  old,  goal,  ey,  pay,  bay,  eight,  aid  54,  paid, 
bade,  kay,  gay,  gate,  oy,  toy. 

Circle  Joinings: — eo,  fur.  oo,  fore  54,  four,  jaw.  AO,  far, 
jar.  ow,  found,  thou,  vow.  AW,  foe,  Jo,  though,  ey,  fay, 
jay,  they  54. 

III.  INITIAL  H,  SH,  W,  Y,  BEFORE  LONG  VOWELS  (§§  55 — 57). 
eo,  hurt,  heard,  herself;   shirt,  shirk,  sherd;   word,  work, 

worst ;  year,  yearn. 

oo,  hoar,  hall,  horn,  horse ;  shore,  shawl,  shorn ;  walk, 
wall,  worn;  yawn,  yawl. 

AO,  Jiark,  heart,  hard;  shark;  yard,  yarn. 

ow,  hound  98 ;  shout. 

AW,  hoe,  hone,  host;  show,  shown,  shoal;  woe,  woke;  yoke. 

ey,  hay,  halo,  haste ;  sJiay,  shake,  shape ;  wake,  waste. 

IV.  LONG  VOWELS  HAVING  ALTERNATIVE  CHARACTERS  (§§  GO — 63). 
ao,  V_ ,  share  55,  yare  57,  ne'er,  pair,  lair  60,  stare  72,  bear, 

tear,  dare,  care  54,  their,  there,  chair  54,  rare. 


Short   Vowds.  109 


\ ,  spare,  mare,  fair  60,  sair,  hair,  luire  55. 

Ay,  *-  ,  shy  55,  sty  71,  rely,  den$,  like,  dine,  by,  ice,  eyes, 
eyeing  61,  shine,  wise,  wind,  pie,  tie,  die,  guy,  thy,  thigh,  lie, 
nigh,  rye. 

\  ,  sign,  my,  fie,  Hine  61,  exercise  82,  assizes  83,  vie,  mine, 
sigh,  size,  vice,  mice,  spies,  spice. 

^j  type,  ripe,  I've  61,  while,  wife,  wipe,  rile,  life,  isle. 
~N,  high  55,  mile  61,  hive,  hypo-,  cypher,  file,  viper. 

uw,  -*  ,  soon  54,  soup,  cool,  through  62,  woo  56,  shoot  55, 
shoe,  pooh,  too,  coo,  coot,  jute,  rue,  root,  moot,  coop. 

yaw  58,  beauty,  peic,  hue,  sue  58,  dupe,  few,  utility  62,  suit, 
hew,  youth,  yule,  use  57,  new,  mew  88,  cue,  lieu,  due,  stew. 

-*-,  Euchre,  ooze,  huge  62,  duke,  -fuge,  -buke,  puke,  fugue. 

iy,  ^\ ,  deep  54,  weave  56,  keep,  chief  62,  eve,  sheep,  heap, 
weep,  tea,  sea,  fee,  lea,  leap,  cheap. 

"v  ,  seat,  seen,  ceased  62,  yeast  57,  weed,  eat,  east,  heath, 
feed,  seen,  lean,  meat. 

~v~,  ease,  seeing,  week  62,  seize,  eke,  siege,  seek,  leech,  meek, 
league,  liege,  leak. 

uo  =  oo,  /^,  your  62,  poor,  sure,  door,  floor; 

(y  mode)  pure,  cure,  lure,  mure. 

io=yeo,  fear  62,  mere,  near  88,  peer,  pier,  beer,  tear,  dear, 
gear,  fear,  veer,  cheer,  jeer,  leer,  rear,  real,  idea,  cohere. 

iyo,  queer  58,  weird  56,  seer,  panacea,  Dea,  Lear,  career. 

irwo,  ewer  62,  hewer,  sewer,  shoer,  wooer,  fewer,  newer. 

owo,  our  62,  (h)our,  power,  bower,  tower,  dower,  cower, 
shower,  sour,  lour,  vower. 

Ayo,  higher,  hire. 

SHORT  VOWELS. 

V.    INITIAL  SHORT  VOWELS  (§  69). 

EE-TICK  : — ahead,  alunj,  asJiare,  ashame  55;  odd,  occasion 
48,  occur,  on,  MS  69,  unto,  undo  104 ;  was  69,  wash,  wood,  wool, 
won  56,  want;  hollow,  hut  56,  hutch,  hunt,  hung,  hug,  hull, 
hush ;  shut  56,  shun,  shock ;  yacht  57,  yon. 

UPWARD  E-TiCK :— add,  adhere  58,  ado,  ash  83,  ass,  atone, 
atune;  essay,  issue  84,  in  48,  it  69;  hat,  head,  hen  55,  hang 
89 ;  shadow,  shed,  shin  55 ;  wet,  win  56,  wind,  wing  83,  wish 
84,  wisp  83,  west;  yap,  yell  57,  yellow,  yes,  yet  57,  y  ester  73. 

C.  8 


110  Progressive  Writing  Exercises. 

DOWNWARD  E-TicK : — about,  above  108,  abode,  account, 
affair,  afore,  ago,  appear  69,  appoint,  averse,  avow,  avoid,  ally, 
alike,  along,  alloy,  aver;  ebb,  echo,  edge,  egg,  ell  69,  etch, 
Ezra  69;  hack,  hallow  96,  hatch,  hedge,  heifer,  hell  55;  i/69; 
shallow,  shell  55,  ship;  web,  wedge,  well  56,  whip,  whiz,  wick,' 
wig,  witch. 

VI.  FINAL  SHORT  VOWELS  (§  70). 

ER-TICK: — utter  69,  under,  shutter,  metre,  water,  waiter, 
voter,  theatre  (iiyeoto),  odour,  Sparta,  parlour,  purser,  whisper, 
labour,  mica,  contra  48,  wisher  72,  weaver,  ever,  author,  savour, 
sofa,  measure,  Russia  84. 

UPWARD  Y : — happy  69,  Effie,  duckie,  buggy,  icy  70,  racy, 
juicy,  fancy  83,  mercy,  saucy,  hussy;  army,  enemy  88;  abbey, 
shabby, heavy,  ivy;  shaky,  hockey,  turkey;  alley,  holy,  woolly. 

DOWNWARD  Y:— ; forty  70,  city  71,  pity,  heady,  gouty, 
hasty,  hearty,  party,  shady,  witty,  woody,  weighty,  ready, 
eddy,  (ha)ndy,  empty  87;  ashy,  touchy  70,  washy,  marshy, 
fishy;  worthy,  earthy,  clergy,  orgie. 

VII.  MEDIAL  ACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS  (§  73). 

0,  A,  U : — pot,  pod,  bud,  pug,  book  82,  buggy  70,  butcher, 
budge;  totter,  took  82,  touch,  toss,  tush,  ton,  tun,  tongue  89, 
duck,  dog,  dutch,  dodge,  dull,  dun,  dong ;  cut,  cud,  cog,  cock, 
cusp  82,  cull  86,  gut,  gush,  gull  86,  gun;  fuss,  foot,  fudge, 
fun,  full ;  thus  73,  thong  89,  thorough,  Thug;  just  (adj.),  sot  72, 
sud,  suck  82,  sully,  sun,  sung  89;  lot,  luck  82,  lug,  loss,  lodge, 
lung  89;  ruck,  rut,  rug,  rust,  run,  rung  89;  mutter,  mother, 
mothy,  muck,  mug,  must,  mull,  among  C9 ;  knot,  knock,  notch, 
knoll,  nun;  stuck,  stung. 

UPWARD  E  : — After  p,  b,  y ;  pap  80,  bab,  yap  57,  bevy, 
pet,  bet  73,  bed,  peck,  beg,  peg,  pithy,  pitchy,  pill,  bell,  yell  57, 
perry,  berry,  yarrow,  pen,  ben,  bang  89,  pest,  best,  bent,  bend. 

Before  t,  d,  si,  11,  s,  n ;  debt,  dead,  death,  cat,  cad,  kiss  82, 
kist,  ken,  cash  84,  get  70,  giddy,  gan,  gas,  gash,  fat  72,  ted,  fen 
83,  vesta,  vent,  let,  led,  less,  lend,  rat,  red,  rest,  rent,  net  73, 
Ned,  nest,  set,  said,  saith,  says,  centre,  send. 

Other  cases;  fact,  fag,  fetch,  fell,  villa,  fish,  ferry,  fang; 
lack,  lag,  latch,  lily,  lash,  ling ;  sack  82,  sedgy,  sell,  sing  89 ; 
rack  81,  rag,  ridge,  rally,  rash,  ring  89;  knack,  nag,  niche, 
knell,  gnash. 

DOWNWARD  E  : — Before  p,  b,  f,  v ;  tap  80,  tabby,  deaf,  cap 
80,  cabby,  gap,  fib,  chap,  jabber,  sap  73,  sieve,  ship,  lap,  rap, 
map  80,  nap. 


Consonants,  P — Z.  Ill 

Other  cases;  kick  73,  keg,  kill  73,  gill,  carry,  catch;  tick, 
tag,  tell  73,  dell,  ditch,  dig,  attack  73,  Dick,  tarry,  stitch, 
stick,  text  71 ;  thick  73,  thatch,  thill,  Jack,  Jill,  check,  chill  73, 
cherry,  attach,  attack,  stick. 

CONSONANTS. 

VIII.  HOOK   BEFORE  p,    B,  F,  v  (§  80) :  —  hop'd,  over   80, 
opened  73,  arbour,  harpy,  harpist,  sharp,  sharper;  upon,  off', 
offence,  oven  69,  offer  70,  obey,  obtain,  obtuse,  6ffice,  opportu- 
nity 78,  oppose,  oppress,  hobby,  hop,  shop,  sliove  80 ;  tub,  cup 
80,  cuff,  pup,  top,  fop,  chop,  rub,  dove,  cover,  duffer,  rough, 
knob;  sup,  muff,  love  80,  suffer,  sub,  mop,  mob,  luff,  lob,  lop. 

SP  : — lispt,  suspicion  80,  wisp  83,  cusp  82,  asp,  wasp,  hasp, 
spat,  speck,  spell,  spend,  spark,  spirt,  spear,  sphere,  spoke. 

IX.  SECOND  CHARACTER  FOR  T,  D,  H,  a  (§  81). 
COMPOUNDS    PT,  KT  : — apt,   oft,   depth,   fifth,   after,    optic, 

hop'd,  adapt,  adopt ;  act,  fact,  active,  rack'd,  doctor,  attack'd, 
lock'd,  aspect ;  left,  safety,  naphtha. 

AFTER  AY,  AD  : — either,  white,  I'd,  height,  hide  61,  kite, 
fight,  mighty,  sight,  quite,  bite,  guide,  provide,  tied,  night, 
light,  pride,  defied,  neither  81,  slight  86,  writer,  spider,  decide, 
divide,  wide,  tight,  chide,  writing,  title,  tidy,  Fido,  abide,  tithe, 
writhe. 

air'd  61,  dared,  cared,  laird,  shared,  spared,  fared. 

TERMINATIONS  : — writeth,  acted,  invited  Rl,  singeth  89, 
cautioned,  occasioned  85,  hardihood  81,  priesthood,  sisterhood, 
widowhood;  forward,  wayward  81,  homeward,  towards  75. 

X.  SK,    EX,     KON    (§   82)  : — skit,   skin,   husky,   whiskey; 
sceptic,  skill,  skip,  sketch;    Esk,   escape,   sky,  scout,  scope, 
skew,  rescue,  scholar,  Scot :    ask,  askt,   cask,  mask,  mask'd, 
desk,  dusk,  husk,  tusk,  musk,  mosque,  eschew,  squaw,  skied. 

Expect,  extant,  extent,  exercise  82,  exemption,  exertion  85, 
excite,  exalt,  excess,  excise,  excuse,  exert,  expend,  expert, 
exposure  84,  expression,  extension;  wax,  axe,  access,  accept, 
accent,  books  83,  tusks,  masks,  next,  fixt,  sixth,  vexed,  mixed. 

Constant,  concur,  condition,  consider,  confer,  connect  82, 
concussion,  concision  85,  contra,  consistent  48,  inconstant  89, 
reconcile,  concern,  converse,  conspire,  continue,  convey. 

XI.  DISTINCTION  BETWEEN  s  AND  z  (§  83): — seal,  zeal;  this, 
these;  precious,  pressures  83;  (7ms  73,  others  108;  ice,  eyes  61; 
price,  prize ;  dice,  dies ;  mace,  maze ;  villous,  villas. 

Wizard,  stanzas,  frenzy  83,  buzz,  nozzle,  puzzle,  hazard, 
hazy,  mazy,  Lizzie.  Cp.  Easy,  busy,  daisy,  noisy. 

8—2 


112  Progressive   Writing  Exercises. 

INFLECTIONS: — HOOK;  apes,  adds,  acts,  wings  83,  sings,  its, 
things,  orbs,  sides,  sights,  loads,  aids,  shades,  hopes,  gifts,  sobs, 
adopts,  lungs,  songs,  meetings,  weights,  facts. 

CIBCLE;  lives,  ashes,  ages,  actions,  hurries,  circumstances, 
themselves,  thinks,  tJianks  83,  ourselves,  yourselves,  sphinx, 
lynx,  occasions,  stations,  wishes,  riches,  injuries. 

CHARACTER;  books,  lists,  eggs,-  hands,  ells,  assizes,  stem*, 
wisps  83,  prints,  friends,  looks,  mists,  bugs,  dogs,  tells,  wells, 
sizes,  exercises,  prizes,  ends,  comes,  lists,  mems. 

COMPOUNDS  NS,  NZ;  fens,  fence,  fenced,  fancy,  funny,  fan- 
cies, fancied,  finesse,  happinesses  83,  finessed,  finest,  fewness, 
fatness,  fineness,  finis,  fines,  fauna,  fenny,  funny,  fences. 

ZD;  supposed,  analyzed  83,  pleased,  used,  sized,  dazed. 

XII.  c,  j  (§  84).  CHARACTER  4  ;  cash,  casher,  cashier, 
gash,  bookish,  sheer,  Neish,  riche. 

CHARACTER  J  ;  (French  words)  rouge,  joie,  jeune  90,  Je, 
J'ai,  J'irai,  bijou. 

BACK-CIRCLE.  Ash,  hash,  wish,  wisher,  fisher,  masher, 
rasher,  pressure,  fresher,  pish,  uppish,  sheepish,  fishy,  lash, 
relish,  apish,  abash,  militia. 

Precious  83,  vicious,  pernicious,  ambitious;  leash,  specie, 
species,  specious,  sufficient  85,  efficient,  physician. 

Dish,  wettish,  judicious,  seditious,  politician,  commercial, 
Persian  85,  tertian,  luscious,  spacious,  gracious,  capacious,  cre- 
taceous, Croatian,  ocean  ;  Asia,  minutiae  76,  Scotia,  harsher, 
cautious,  martial,  social,  judicial,  official,  special,  nasturtium. 

Hush,  wash  56,  washy,  blush,  bushy,  push,  Russia,  usher, 
washer. 

Wished,  astonished,  finished,  varnished,  relished,  dished; 
Welsh;  financial,  essential,  potential, sententious,  penitentiary; 
ancient  84,  censure  54. 

Ship,  worship,  heir  ship,  fellowship,  scholarship,  ladyship, 
kinship,  sonship,  membership,  partnership. 

ntc.  Inch,  hunch,  haunch,  pinch,  punch,  lunch,  wrench, 
quench,  tench,  branch,  bunchy,  bencJier,  venture,  century. 

ndj.  Hinged,  angel,  lounge,  spongy,  stingy,  dingy,  engine, 
dungeon,  avenger,  orange,  arrange,  range  69,  stranger,  danger 
89,  changes  84,  injure. 

ejo.  Azure,,  measure,  leisure,  pleasure,  treasure,  embrasure 
(y-mode  in  derivatives,  such  as  glazier,  brazier,  hosier,  seizure, 
exposure  etc.). 


Consonants,  *S',  C,  J,  L,  A'.  113 

XIII.  TERMINATIONS  CON,  JON  (§  85).     Station,  collation  85, 
indication  48,  creation  75,  relation,  nation,  oration,  citation, 
vacation;  emotion,  devotion,  potion;   exertion,  version,  asser- 
tion, emersion;  caution,  portion,  torsion;  depletion,  (com)ple- 
tion,  lesion;  solution,  revolution,  constitution;    collusion,  illu- 
sion, fusion;  occasion,  invasion,  persuasion,  abrasion;  corro- 
sion, explosion. 

Concussion,  concession,  mission,  passion,  fashion,  position, 
coalition,  volition;  pet(i)tion,  cond(i)tion  82,  add(i)tion,  sed(i)- 
tion:  concision,  collision,  vision,  derision,  division,  decision. 

Exc(e)ption,  conception,  description ;  question,  sugges- 
tion, (com)bustion;  emulsion,  revulsion,  expulsion;  exemption, 
ass(u)mption,  redemption;  t(e)nsion,  att(e)ntion,  dist(e)nsion, 
ext(e)nsion,  pension,  mention;  action,  auction,  faction,  -j(c)c- 
tion,  d(i)ction,  concoction,  suction;  distinction,  ext(i)nction, 
sanction,  function,  junction.  (See  Ex.  XIX.) 

XIV.  L  AND  E.    FORWARD  fl  R  : — try  71,  cry,  pry,  actress, 
Henry,  shrine  86,  bray,  dray,  fray,  gray,  stray,  spray,  scrape, 
screw,  shrew,  entry,  already,  cavalry,  enrich,  enrage. 

P'raps,  sep'rate  86,  operate  65,  different,  emp'ror  86,  corp'ral, 
fav'rite,  neighboring  p.  91,  temperature  84,  av'rage,  ev'ry,  correct, 
gen'rous,  dext'rous,  wondrous,  wondring,  fact'ry. 

BACKWARD  Q  R: — airy,  weary  86,  Tory  71,  gory,  starry, 
hero,  era;  vary,  Mary;  dreary,  furore;  Sarah,  Laura,  Dora, 
Aurora;  zero  (yeo),  Nero;  Cairo,  Irish,  spiral,  desirous,  desireth, 
admirer. 

curry,  morrow  86,  Surrey  70,  hurry,  worry,  perry  86,  merry, 
yarrow,  arrows,  error,  horror,  orator,  origin,  orange  69 ; 
thorough,  Harry,  hurrah;  historic,  Paris  72,  parish;  injury 
72,  fishery,  missionary. 

history  71,  votary,  parliamentary  87,  aspirate  86,  spirit  108, 
emery,  misery  p.  101,  necessary,  surround,  resurrect,  nursery, 
celery,  butchery,  plethora,  marine ;  contrary,  temp(o)rary. 

arrange  69,  array,  arrear,  around  p.  91,  arrive,  aright,  arose, 
arrest,  arouse,  awry,  oration. 

FORWARD  Q  L: — plate,  slight  86,  slay,  slow,  splay,  splice, 
blow,  blur,  flay,  flow  71,  lovely,  wifely,  comely,  assembly. 

BACKWARD  fi  L: — COMPOUNDS  KL,  GL;  clay,  glad  86,  clear, 
cloud,  glow,  glory,  close,  glare. 

Amply,  ampler,  coupling  91,  simply,  singly,  ugly,  affably, 
fully,  early,  surly,  really,  mentally,  verbally,  graphically, 
finally,  formally,  holy,  belly,  coolie,  woolly. 


114  Progressive   Writing  Exercises. 

CBOSS-TICK -LY: — idly,  gent(leman)ly ,  prettily,  only,  verily, 
utterly,  kingly  91,  longingly  89,  happily,  bitterly,  beggarly, 
fairly,  fairily,  freely,  merely,  surely,  lawlessly,  piteously  75, 
neatly  77(1),  outwardly  81,  oddly,  deadly,  kindly,  lately  108, 
gaily,  duly,  solely,  firstly,  coolly,  wholly,  formerly. 

HALF-SIZE  L;  wealth,  self,  help,  pelt,  old,  milk,  silt,  realm  86, 
healthy,  shelf,  bulb,  felt,  held,  told,  silk,  elm,  illume,  sailed, 
furled,  world,  field,  yield,  seal'd,  mild,  cult,  fault,  salt,  elbow. 

XV.  M,  N  (§§  87,  88).  CHAEACTER  /  M  :— me  48,  may, 
my  61,  make,  mew  88,  more  108,  mere  88,  murmur,  mare  60, 
mile  61,  moke,  maul :  smoke  87,  small  72,  Psalm,  time,  came, 
germ  87,  Iwme,  seem,  assume  64,  tomb,  doom,  ream  77  (1), 
dream,  foam,  palm,  calm,  storm. 

AFTEE  SHORT  VOWELS  DISTINGUISHED  BY  MODE,  §  77(3); — 
swim,  swam,  swum,  sham,  Shem,  Ham  77,  hem,  hymn,  mum- 
mery, Tarn,  Pym  87,  Pam,  hum,  humble,  hemper,  hamper, 
thumb,  numb  88,  cam  (cp.  come),  Sam,  sum  (cp.  some),  comma 
(cp.  comer),  lamb,  dam,  jam,  gem,  gum,  crumb,  cram,  cream 
77(1),  slam,  slim,  ram,  rim,  rurn,  glum,  glim,  gloom,  bomb. 

CHARACTER  /  KM: — am,  among  69,  amid  87,  amiss,  amuse, 
ammonia  75,  amount  108,  amend,  ample  91,  amble,  am- 
bition; emery,  emerge,  emetic,  eminent,  emotion  85,  empty  87, 
embrace,  embody,  employ,  emperor;  ember,  emphatic  80, 
imagine,  immerse,  immortal,  immure,  imbue,  impend,  impa- 
tient, implant,  important  80,  imply,  imprint,  nymph,  lymph. 

Poem,  I  am,  suum,  meum  64,  deum,  Hyam,  geometric,  dia- 
mond, triumph,  Siam,  diem,  museum,  vehement. 

Memory,  some  87,  -gram,  camp,  camp'd  80,  drachm,  come 
87,  combat,  committee,  compact,  compound,  nominal. 

COMPOUNDS  MT,  MD: — empty  87,  exempt,  tempt,  warmth, 
something,  sometimes  108;  seem'd,  dimm'd  87,  limb'd,  deem'd, 
assumed,  timed,  form'd  77. 

Sentiment,  momentous,  implements,  argumentative,  parlia- 
mentary, amusement  87,  elementary,  augment,  experimental, 
instrumentality.  (In  words,  such  as  augment,  lament,  cement, 
in  which  the  termination  -ment  is  accented,  it  should  be  written 
in  full.) 

MN: — m(a)n  87  (cp.  men),  m(a)nner,  m(a)ny  108,  human, 
woman,  icomen,  German  87,  sermon,  Shyman  77(3),  yeoman, 
footman,  chairman,  madman,  seaman,  common,  comment, 
lemon,  salmon,  demon,  ermine. 

omniscient  88,  omnivorous,  omnibus,  chimney  88, gymnasium, 
calumny,  indemnity,  amnesty,  condemnation. 


Consonants,  M,  N,  Q.  115 

TERMINATIONS  NY,  NEE: — journey,  attorney,  cony,  pony,  tiny, 
horny,  downy,  puny,  stony,  shiny;  any  70,  penny,  fenny, 
whinny;  honey,  funny  83,  money;  Germany,  harmony,  colony, 
agony ;  guinea. 

Minor,  China,  honour  88,  donna,  inner  88,  dinner,  sinner, 
Hannah,  Lena,  lamina. 

The  combinations  xj  xma-,  \^  mAW,  must  be  distin- 
guished from  the  characters  ,/  em,  /,  ny,  respectively.  The 
angle  in  the  combination  ./^  nAW,  may  be  straightened  out 
in  practice ;  thus,  /^>  in  the  words  know,  knows,  known, 
knowing,  noble,  note,  notice,  etc. 

XVI.  ING  (§  89).  CHAKACTER  f  AQ  : — sowing,  saying, 
dying,  sawing,  going,  knowing,  drawing,  pawing,  seeing  62, 
sighing,  maying ; 

tongue,  sung,  bung,  lung,  rung,  thong,  among,  gong,  dong, 
stung,  Hong-Kong,  clung,  flung. 

CHAEACTEB  J  AQ  : — sang,  bang,  rang,  gingham,  wing,  th(i)ng, 
d(i)ng,  king,  fang,  t(i)ng,  fling,  cling,  sting,  harangue,  me- 
ringue; sizing,  losing,  parsing,  shilling,  hunting,  supping,  watch- 
ing, washing,  living,  edging,  halting,  waiting  ;  hoping,  keeping, 
sobbing,  loving,  offing,  holding,  pushing ;  vowing,  suing,  hewing, 
toying  ;  coupling  91,  ailing,  darling;  aiming,  coming,  seeming, 
foaming  (or  cross-stroke  after  m  if  clearer). 

CHARACTER  ~^  IQ  : — ending,  hurting,  herring,  resting,  singe- 
ing, hooping  89,  thanking  108,  reading,  sitting,  meeting,  st(a)nd- 
iug,  stooping,  cooping;  fishing,  wishing,  changing;  cursing, 
nursing,  racing,  loosing  (or  cross-stroke  after  s  if  clearer). 

CROSS-STROKE  : — being,  doings,  thinking,  having,  giving,  en- 
joying, innings,  handing  ;  hurrying,  pitying,  longingly,  riding, 
writing,  cursing,  blessing,  using,  opening,  aiming,  carrying, 
whinnying,  inviting,  lightening,  adapting,  acting,  mentioning ; 
suffering,  airing,  hearing,  soaring,  during,  wearing,  daring, 
glaring,  measuring,  wondering,  neighbouring,  uttering,  hiring, 
showering,  scouring;  fancying,  fencing. 

CHARACTER    ^  IQD  ;  COMPOUNDS  QK,  QO,  QT,  QD,  QH  : — ink, 

shrink,  wink,  sink,  zinc,  inker,  anchor,  hanker,  conquer, 
England,  language,  anguish,  unguent,  angry,  hungry,  longer, 
ingot,  wrinkle,  ankle,  uncle,  inkling,  tinkle,  angle,  dangled; 
ink'd  108,  distinct,  instinct,  link'd,  defunct,  adjunct,  unctuous, 
thank'd,  rank'd ;  banged,  wrong'd,  wing'd,  long'd,  length  108, 
strengthen. 


Progressive   Writing  Exercises. 


XVII.  UNACCENTED   SHORT  VOWELS   INDICATED,   BUT  NOT 
WRITTEN  : — 

Shortened  71,  6pened  73,  f6rtune  84,  spacious  84,  fallacious, 
luscious,  Persian  85,  Asian,  g6rgeous  (cp.  gorges  83),  human 
87,  climate,  ardent,  merchant,  earnest,  circuit,  aiidit,  urgent, 
certain,  perfect,  cautious  (c),  purchase. 

Debate  54,  defer  70,  relate,  dictate,  rem6te,  return,  devote, 
belief,  ex€rt,  extent  82,  exp6se,  expdrt,  exc(e)pt  108,  expand, 
cxh6rt,  divide,  polite,  delight,  decide,  denied,  marine,  reverse, 
relume  86,  renew,  salute,  surr6und,  career,  best6w,  devdur, 
.despair,  delay,  declare,  supply,  minute  (cp.  minute),  papa, 
regard,  repdrt;  array,  around,  opp6se,  entice,  induce. 

Attic  73,  etiquette  73,  abbot  73,  adept  (cp.  adapt),  senate  (cp. 
sent),  sabbath,  women  (wim)  87,  shilling  89,  challenge,  orange 
69,  Errand,  hatchet  78,  prentice  78,  justice,  h6stess,  rigid  78, 
locket  (cp.  lock'd),  6ven  69,  pellet  86,  c6met  (cp.  commit), 
merit,  magic,  gr(a)phic  54,  tippet  (cp.  tipp'd),  rapid  (cp.  wrapt), 
rabbit,  rabid,  6ffice,  preface,  limit,  thicket,  current,  deafen, 
weapon,  happen. 

Depend  73,  defend,  detach,  finesse  73,  Thibet  73,  become, 
begin,  canal  (cp.  cannel),  relax  (cp.  relics),  request,  defect, 
corrupt,  entrap,  intend,  intrust  (cp.  interest),  indent,  suggest. 

D(e)cimal  71,  animal  88,  h6nesty,  apathy,  attitude,  appetite, 
edify,  certify,  Excellent,  militant,  company,  c6mbatant,  affable, 
m6veable  (move  108),  vegetable,  typical,  article,  16gical,  metri- 
cal, statistical,  political,  m£trop61itan,  penetrability,  stability, 
solidity,  acc6mmodate  65,  agitate  65,  intimate  87,  ultimate, 
conjugate,  relative,  adjective,  argumentative  87,  orthography, 
sten6grapher,  patrimony,  customary,  military,  history  71, 
me'mory  87, aspirate  86,  naturalist  (natcr-l-st),  ignorant,  guaran- 
t6e,  capital,  ethical,  accuracy,  benefit,  f6athery,  Expeditious. 

Yesterday  73,  understand,  advertise,  permit  73,  exercise  82, 
interdict,  appertain,  pr6perty  73,  liberty,  p6verty,  shepherdess, 
Saturday,  m6dern,  Eastern,  pattern,  govern ;  effort  73,  com- 
fort (come  87),  forget  104,  forbid,  forb6re,  particular  78,  6ppor- 
tunity  78,  reformation,  purport,  prdverb,  surprise,  niggard. 

XVIII.  UNACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS  INSERTED  TO  FACILI- 
TATE JOININGS: — 

BEFORE  AND  AFTER  THE  S-TICK  : — acid,  assets,  asses  72, fancies 
83,  happinesses  83,  Alice,  person  72,  present  77  (3),  subsidy  83, 
consequent,  p(ur)pose  108,  possess,  beside,  gazette,  pursuit. 

AFTER  ERY,  NDJ  : — engine,  dungeon,  injury ;  hemorrhage, 


Vowel  Indication.  117 


horizontal,  character,  historic,  Part's,  correspondent,  origin, 
lyric,  satiric,  satirist,  ferrous,  6racle,  courage,  America. 

BEFORE  AND  AFTER  C  AND  CON  : — parish,  cherish,  flourish, 
nourish,  perish,  apish,  machine  84,  vicious  84,  precious  83, 
sufficient  85,  passionate  85,  missionary,  questionist  85,  fac- 
tious 84,  anxiows  84,  ancient  84,  physician,  species,  treasury, 
proportionate,  abolitionist. 

AFTER  3  )  : — sceptic,  peptic,  practise,  practical,  lighten  81, 
whiten,  afternoon  108. 

XIX.  E-TICK  OMITTED  IN  CASES  WHERE  THE  ACCENT  NEED 
NOT  BE   MARKED   (§  73)    (The  words  in  brackets  are  written 
with  the  A-tick) : — Ten  (ton),  tent,  'tis,  test,  ting,  tend,  den 
(dun),  dent,  d(e)cimal,  d(i)smal  71,  d(i)ng  89,  dazzle,   dizzy, 
sting,    steady  (study),  st(ca)d  83,    st(a)nzas   83,    stand,   stet, 
intend,  indent,  t(e)nsion,  int(e)ntion,  distinction  85,  petition, 
than,  thank,  that,  then,  this  (thus),  thing  108  (thong  89),  thin, 
thither,  pathetic,  gent,  general  108,  (John),  Jenny  (Johnnie), 
jet,  chat,  January,  chance,  gender,  jest,  suggest,  Jack. 

Miscellaneous;  Scripture  84,  except  108,  exception  85, 
living  89  (loving  80),  never  108,  spirit  108,  ninny  (nonny), 
river,  financial  84,  p'raps,  particular  78,  description,  February, 
Nancy,  preface,  graphic  54,  prediction  (cp.  production),  next. 

XX.  OMISSION  OF  LONG  VOWELS  (§  65)  :  Long  vowels  are 
omitted  in  the  following  common  words,  the  outlines  of  which 
will  be  found  in  the  list   on  p.    106:   ow,    about,   amou?tt, 
without;    oo,    because,    cause,    according,    call,    lord,    short, 
thought',   AO,  after,  half,  laughter,  can't,  shan't,  charge;   eo, 
purpose,  perfect;  ly,  been,  between,  indeed,  people;  Ay,  behind, 
bind,   find,    kind,    mind,  child,    combine,   scribe;   irw,  Jury, 
proof,  prove,  approve,  move,  remove,  super-. 

The  vowels  ao,  AW,  oy,  are  always  expressed. 

Omission  of  ey : — again,  against,  arrange,  range,  strange, 
change,  danger,  great,  lady,  late,  nature,  same,  stage,  state. 

Termination  -ate : — dedicate,  indicate,  accommodate  65, 
liquidate,  mitigate,  assimilate,  decimate,  fascinate  65,  termi- 
nate, operate  65,  execrate,  tolerate,  agitate  65,  meditate, 
cogitate,  reinstate,  sulphate  (cp.  sulphite  81),  irate,  com- 
memorate, indicator,  navigator,  testatrix.  (Note ;  This  termi- 
nation is  generally  short  in  adjectives  and  substantives.) 

Ey  should  also  be  omitted  in  the  termination  -ization,  as  in 
nationalization,  crystallization,  etc.,  the  outlines  being  formed 
by  simply  turning  the  -tion  circle  on  the  final  z  of  nationalize, 
crystallize.  The  vowel  should  be  inserted  after  c,  kt,  pt,  and 


118  Progressive  Writing  Exercises. 

in  dissyllables  when  accented :  as  in,  appreciate  78,  vitiate, 
negociate,  associate  (omit  y  after  c  in  these  words),  narrate, 
dictate,  co-optate. 

XXI.  SHORT  VOWELS  are  omitted  (§  73)  in  the  following 
common  words;  the  outlines  will  be  found  on  pp.  106,  107 ;  the 
words  in  brackets  are  distinguished  by  the  insertion  of  their 
vowels. 

Above,  another,  body,  but  (bet),  come  (cam),  become,  did 
(dead),  does,  done  (dun),  enough,  except  accept,  gone  (gun), 
judge,  jwst,  land  (lend),  length,  long  (ling),  man  (men),  manner 
(manna),  many  (Minnie),  month,  none  (nun),  not  (net), 
nothing,  other,  pwt  (pot),  shall  (shell),  should  (shod),  some 
(sam),  stt'll,  till  tell,  until,  young,  when  (pen  pun). 

MODE  OF  HIATUS. 

XXII.  BEFOKE  A  VOWEL  : — 

MODE  (1)  W  (§§  58,  75) ;  qua,  queer,  equal,  where,  whey  58, 
quite  81,  quinquangular  89,  quote,  equation,  equip,  quick, 
quality,  quart,  square,  squirt,  vanquish,  relinquish,  distinguish, 
anguish,  language  89,  unguent;  Gwen,  Guadafui,  guano, 
Guatemala,  Puebla,  Buenos,  bivouac;  acquiesce  58,  requiem, 
aqueous,  obsequious ;  twirl,  twist,  twin,  twain,  twice,  dwell, 
dwarf,  thwack ;  sweet  76,  swallow,  sway,  swear,  swore,  swung, 
swan,  persuade;  away,  aware,  await,  bewail,  beware,  noway, 
nowhere,  nowise,  midway,  highway,  fta/fway  108,  Conway  76, 
lengthways  108,  always,  otherwise  108,  ivayword,  forward  81, 
towards  75,  inward,  outward;  Darwin,  Spurway,  herewith  81. 

Terminations  -ual,  etc.  (U  unaccented,  character  J  omit- 
ted) ; — usual,  continuation,  vacuum,  valuable  75,  Mantua, 
Mantuan,  annual,  manual,  virtual,  actuate,  actuary,  J(a)nuary, 
unctuous,  virtuous,  conspicuous,  spirituous,  influence,  valua- 
tion, situation,  residuum,  menstruum. 

MODE  (2),  BEFOBE  H;  mishap  76,  priesthood,  behind  75, 
rehearse,  adhere  58,  shorthand  71,  longhand  89,  withhold  81, 
madchen  90,  inhale,  unhealthy. 

MODE  (3),  Y;  abuse,  acute,  argue,  due,  adieu,  duty,  issue, 
virtue  84,  minutiae  76:  creation  75,  foliation,  mediation, 
permeation,  conciliation,  appreciate;  sheer,  cashier  84, 
sincere  76,  idea,  cohere,  Jehu,  Mayhew;  Appii,  embryo,  Komeo, 
Antonio,  signer,  poignant  76,  Naenia,  Mercutio,  folio,  studio, 
nuncio,  ratio,  meow,  piano  (pyeonow). 

Terminations;  future  84,  departure,  overture,  stature, 
furniture,  temperature  84,  culture,  posture,  texture,  mixture, 


Mode  of  Hiatus.  119 

gesture,  picture  84,  lecture,  structure,  procedure,  hosier, 
exposure  84,  composure,  seizure :  India  75,  mania,  hernia, 
saviour,  warrior,  easier,  copier,  pannier;  obvious,  piteous, 
odious,  impious;  sodium  75,  premium,  idiom,  opium;  Christian 
p.  91,  lenient;  idiot,  immediate,  Juliet;  lineal,  cordial, 
spaniel,  nausea,  carrier,  collier,  happiest,  easiest,  atheist, 
medieval,  polyanthus. 

XXIII.  HIATUS  BETWEEN  Two  CONSONANTS,  §  77  (1) : — 
MODE  (1)  is  used  for  terminations  and  abbreviated  words 

(§  100). 

MODE  (2),  ABSENCE  OF  VOWELS;  Ezra  69,  Elsie  71,  tipsy, 
Betsy,  wisps,  stems,  comes  83;  snare  71,  snore,  small  71, 
smoke  87,  realm  86,  dismal  71 ;  anxious  84,  noxious,  nuptial 
(-col),  factious  84,  anxiety  83,  igneous,  recognize  91,  dogmatic, 
alma,  pigmy. 

COMPOUND  WORDS  ;  fit-ful  71,  sight-less,  sad-ness,  king-dom 
89,  wis-dom  83;  hand-maid  71,  short-hand  71,  long-hand  89, 
first-class  71,  up-shot  84,  off-shoot  84,  text-book  71,  out-do  71, 
sing-song  89,  night-shirt,  bank-rupt;  ab-scissa,  dis-content, 
in-stead  83,  in-constant  89,  in-crease  89,  un-kind  89,  sub-sidy 
83,  Wednes-day  83,  ab-sent,  vice-roy,  fine-ness. 

MODE  (3),  UNACCENTED  U  (yw);  populate  77,  specitlate, 
accumulate,  calculate,  rivulet,  popular,  particular,  angular, 
emulous,  amputate  77,  occupy  77,  sextuple,  voluble  77,  luxury 
91,  augury,  penury,  argument  87,  education,  consecutive,  edu- 
cate, tabulate,  accurate,  suppurate,  supreme,  superior,  soluble, 
picturesque,  usury,  bureau,  impudent,  statute,  diminutive, 
manufactory,  volume  (cp.  vellum),  furore. 

XXIV.  SHORT  VOWELS  FOLLOWING  LONG  VOWET  3,  §  77  (2). 

UNACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS: — fi-MooE;  scion,  science, 
ion,  iron,  acquired,  quiet,  fired,  riot,  proprietor,  pious,  pioneer, 
diary;  violate,  violin,  violent,  hyaline,  denial,  pliant,  renewal, 
brewery,  theory,  aerate,  dial,  dual,  royal,  coward,  nowadays, 
Lewis,  Joachim,  aeon,  paean,  European,  Zion. 

Y-MODE;  society,  piety,  anxiety,  variety,  proprietor,  gaiety; 
deity,  vehicle,  vehement ;  coexist,  heroic,  heroine,  poesy, 
poetry;  annuity,  continuity,  gratuitous,  suet,  ruin,  vowel, 
towel,  fuel,  jewel,  Jewess,  voyage,  deify,  neozoic,  Owen,  soloist, 
theist,  highest,  nihilist,  knoweth,  doeth,  sayeth. 

FINAL  SHORT  VOWELS: — DOWNWARD  Y;  showy,  shadowy, 
doughy,  bowie,  boughy,  dewy,  boyish,  cowish,  shrewish,  yellow- 
ish. 

UPWARD  Y ;  clayey,  wheyish,  skyish,  Jewish,  rawish. 


120  Progressive   Writing  Exercises. 

Q ;  sower,  boa,  lower,  Iowa ;  gayer,  sayer,  layer  ;  ire,  fire, 
desire,  quire,  Shire,  Messiah,  liar,  lyre,  esquire,  Isaiah,  Noah; 
drawer,  sawer ;  lawyer,  sawyer,  bowyer. 

ACCENTED  SHORT  VOWELS: — Aeolic,  aerial,  zootomy,  biology, 
chads,  poetic,  tuition,  duenna,  diagonal,  minuet,  triennial, 
priority,  theodolite,  de-6xidize,  fiasco,  neography. 

HIATUS  AFTER  ft  VOWELS  IMPLYING  E.  (N.B.  Strictly  speak- 
ing, in  all  these  cases,  the  character  fl  ery  should  be  written 
because  the  r  is  pronounced:  its  omission  must  be  regarded 
merely  as  a  convenient  abbreviation,  but  is  always  to  be 
recommended  in  the  case  of  derivative  words  when  the  r  is 
not  sounded  in  the  primitive.) 

MODE  (1),  TERMINATIONS;  labourer,  nearer,  utterer  91, 
hearer,  sharer,  scorer,  poorer,  sorer,  murderer.  (Also  abbrevi- 
ation for  termination  -nee,  see  below.) 

MODE  (2)  (implying  ro);  parent  91,  coherent,  occurrent, 
different;  electoral,  scriptural,  floral,  choral,  Europe  (yoo); 
(character  /  s  disjoined)  dangerous  89,  murderous,  coniferous, 
one?-ows,  odorows,  venturous,  rapturous,  cho?-us,  porous,  sono- 
rous, serous;  (character  /  joined)  serum,  Sarum,  forum, 
quorum,  decorum;  utterance  91  (full  form),  difference,  inter- 
ference, coherence,  endurance,  occurrence  (abbreviation  for 
termn.  -nee,  character  /  s,  mode  (1),  see  §  100) ;  honorary, 
horary;  considerable,  sufferable,  transfe?-able,  answerable, 
colourable,  honourable  100,  measu?'able,  adorable,  cu?'able  (the 
termn.  -able  is  generally  added  by  a  dot;  §  100).  Similarly  in 
derivatives  of  words  ending  in  -ire,  such  as  desirous,  desirable, 
desireth,  desiring,  if  the  o  is  retained  the  r  should  not  be 
written. 

MODE  (3)  (implying  ry);  series,  heiress,  peeress,  tutoress, 
murderess;  nearest,  fearest,  queerest,  fiorisi,  purist,  purest, 
aorist;  poureth,  careth,  heareth;  purity,  maturity,  security; 
(character  i  )  bearish,  boorish,  currish,  moorish,  feverish, 
gibberish. 

COMPOUNDS  ;  herein,  thereon,  whereas,  thereabouts,  thereat, 
thereof  (v),  whereupon,  whereunto,  where'er. 

BEFORE  A  VOWEL,  Y-Moos  : — laborious,  glorious,  gloria, 
curious,  Laureate,  historian;  superior,  inferior, exterior,  serious, 
period,  experience,  criterion,  imperial,  material ;  various, 
variable,  agrarian,  area,  Aryan,  barium;  seignorial,  centurion. 

XXV.  HIATUS  BETWEEN  Two  CONSONANTS  IN  CASES  WHERE 
A  VOWEL  is  NECESSARILY  IMPLIED,  §  77  (1) : — 


Mode  of  Hiatus.  121 


NIY;  knee,  neat,  knead,  kneel,  needle,  neophyte,  niece, 
beneath,  unique,  nominee,  magnesium. 

RIY;  re,  read,  ream,  real,  reason,  re-assert,  re-export,  region, 
reaper;  three,  scree,  free,  freedom,  freeze,  degrees,  agreed, 
breeze ;  increase  89,  appreciate  78,  creature,  screecher,  wreath, 
trio,  Grecian,  pre-arrange. 

Luw;  loom,  leeward,  halleluia  77,  relume  86,  illume, 
luminous,  lose,  loose;  flew,  flue,  flume,  fluor,  fluid,  fluent, 
-fluous,  -fluity, -fluence ;  blew,  blue,  bluer,  bluey,  bluish,  bluely, 
blueness,  bloom,  ablution;  clue  86,  -elude,  -elusion;  glue  86, 
glued,  gloom  77. 

ALPHABETIC  WORDS;  pea,  P's,  peas  (2),  peace  (3),  piece, 
peat,  peep,  pique,  peak;  B's,  bees,  beat,  bead,  beak,  beef, 
beach,  beast,  bean,  how-be-it;  keys,  keyhole,  keystone,  key- 
board, keyed,  gives,  given,  giver;  joys,  joyful,  joyous,  rejoiced, 
enjoyed,  join,  joint,  joined;  form,  perform,  reform,  forward, 
forfeit,  formality  (the  mode  should  not  be  used  in  fore,  forth, 
forge,  ford,  fort,  fawn);  whose,  whoever,  whom,  whosoe'er. 

Two  LONG  VOWELS  IN  SUCCESSION  (§  63)  -.—hiatus,  oasis, 
throughout,  coercion,  Aeolian,  Iota,  aorta,  Phaeacia,  liowe'er 
soe'er  108,  we  are,  you  are,  they  are  104,  they  all,  he  ought  106, 
hyena,  inchoate,  Croatian,  theorbo,  lona,  Iowa,  coordinate, 
coheir,  coeval,  co-aid,  Leo,  de-odorize,  lago,  noyau,  payee, 
Noachian,  tea-urn,  Lehigh,  Ohio,  heigho,  ha-ha,  Yahoo. 

XXVI.  VOWEL  DOTS.  The  following  words  should  be 
dotted  to  distinguish  them  from  those  in  brackets  : — 

Wander  o  (wonder  A),  anterior  (interior),  apologue  (epilogue), 
aliment  (element),  immigration  (emigration),  irruption  (erup- 
tion), position  (possession),  latter  (letter),  accept  (except). 

The  following  cases  would,  as  a  rule,  be  sufficiently  distin- 
guished by  the  context,  but  should  be  dotted  in  careful  writing. 

Shot  (shut),  hock  (hook),  itch  (etch),  will  (testament,  cp. 
well),  whack  (wick),  wag  (wig),  bog  (bug),  tongs  (tongues), 
dock  (duck),  don  (dun),  cock,  cook,  folly  (fully),  sot  soot,  lock 
(luck),  rot  (rut),  knot  (nut),  pack  pick,  pig  (peg), .bill  (bell),  pin 
pan  (pen),  band  (bend),  kit  (cat),  fan  (fen),  vista  (vesta),  lad 
(led),  lass  (less),  writ  (rat),  rad  (red),  wrist  (rest),  knit  (net), 
sat  sit  (set),  sinned  (send),  sang  (sing),  rig  rag,  rang  (ring),  tap 
tip,  lap  lip,  rap  rip,  nap  nip,  tack  tick,  stack  stick,  taxed  (text), 
chick  (check),  till  (tell),  than  (then),  wad  (wood),  laughed  (if 
pronounced  laft,  cp.  left). 

The  dots  should  never  be  omitted  in  rare  words,  and 
unfamiliar  proper  names. 


122  Progressive    Writing  Exercises. 

XXVII.  INITIALS  (§  94).    Write  out  the  alphabet  of  initials 
several  times,  distinguishing  particularly  U.  and  Z.,  C.  and  Q., 
M. and  N. 

A.B.A.,  B.A.,  M.A.,  D.D.,  D.C.L.,  F.E.S.,  F.G.S.,  F.E.A.S., 
F.Sh.S.,  H.R.H.,  T.B.H.,  U.S.A.,  H.I.M.,  Q.C.,  J.P.,  M.P., 
E.G.,  K.C.B.,  K.C.S.I.,  V.C.,  H.M.S.,  B.A.,  E.N.,  E.E., 
R.H.A.,  S.P.G.,  C.E.T.S.,  S.P.Q.E.,  S.P.C.K.,  N.W.,  S.E., 
E.G.,  W.C.,  Y.M.C.A.,  M.C.C. 

J.W.L.,  G.V.H.,  S.  A.  H.,  F.B.R.,  D.A.  H.  A.,  W.V.W., 
W.E.  B.E.,  T.  G.  E.,  SiJ.P.  A.,  E.F.F.J.,  H.J.J.,  P.P.H., 
CH.  G.  J.,  N.  L.  B.,  E.  H.  W.,  A.  W.  G.,  F.  C.  J.,  W.  C.  H., 
M.  T.  J.,  M.  I.  E.,  B.  B.  A.,  F.  K.  J.,  G.  F.  A.,  S.  J.  J.,  T.  G.  H., 
D.  C.  LL.,  D.  F.  S.,  C.  J.  A.,  P.  A.  N.,  W.  H.  H.  T. 

XXVIII.  ABBREVIATIONS.    Abbreviate  the  following  words 
as  indicated  by  the  italics. 

Abbreviate,  absolute,  acknowledge,  administrator,  adminis- 
tratrix, advantage,  advance,  advertisement,  altogether,  antago- 
nistic, archiep/scopaZ,  appropriate,  Bankruptcy,  baptis?«,  benig- 
nant, benevolent,  benefice?it,  beneficiaZ,  Captain,  catholic,  cha- 
racter (-istic),  Christianity,  consideration,  constitution,  con- 
struction, correspondence,  council,  counsel,  Difference,  difficulty, 
defendant,  defence,  destitution,  destruction,  distinguis/i,  dis- 
charge, dynamo,  Ecclesiastical,  enoratous,  episcopaZian,  esquire, 
establish,  evidence,  examination,  executor,  executrix,  expensive, 
extraordinary,  extravagant,  extingiw's/i,  FamiZiar,  feminine, 
February,  financial,  General  (-ization),  generation,  government, 
Ignorance,  immediate,  imperturbabZe,  impracticaoZe,  impreg- 
nable, incognito,  indefatigable,  indignant,  individual,  inemcie?^, 
influence,  in/Zuential,  in/ormation,  institution,  instruction,  in- 
telli</ioZe,  Jurisprudence,  Knowledge,  Language,  learned,  Ma- 
gazine, magni/icence,  manufacture,  mathe?»aticaZ,  microscope, 
member,  mortgage,  Natural  (tc),  notwithstanding,  Object,  objec- 
tion, observation,  obstruction,  opinion,  opportunity,  original, 
Parliamentary,  particular,  pecuZiar,  perhaps,  perpendicular, 
philanthropic,  phonetic,  plenipotentiary,  plaintiff,  positive 
(poz),  possibZe  (pos),  practical,  preservation,  principal  (-le), 
probabZe,  pubZication,  Question,  Eecognize,  religion,  relinauis/t, 
resignation,  represent,  respective,  responsiZnZity,  Satisfactory, 
seZfevident,  several,  signify,  significance,  speak,  speech,  strength, 
subject,  subjection,  subordinate,  substitution,  substructure, 
suspect,  Transcribe,  Yesterday. 

XXIX.  OMISSION  OP  FINAL  CONSONANTS  AFTER  LONG  VOWELS 
(see  §§  65,  100) : — faiZ,  avaiZ,  raUway,  royal,  loyal,  soil,  oil, 
smaZZ,  at-aW,  aZmost,  aZways,  aZso,  darZing,  deaZ  (in  phrases), 


A  bbreviations.  123 


feel,  tool,  rule,  smiZe,  beguile,  juvenile,  volatile,  tertile,  puerile, 
fragile,  mercantile  (omit  I  generally  in  termination  -He) ;  time, 
came,  fame,  James,  terms,  PsaZm,  home,  at-home ;  north,  south, 
forth,  Vforth,  both,  further,  father,  rather,  brother ;  vary,  glory 
107;  scope,  life,  chief,  belie/,  believe,  relief,  relieve,  deceive, 
deceit,  strive,  contrive,  derive,  arrive,  deprive,  observe,  preserve, 
reserve,  deserve,  gave ;  most,  post,  least ;  please,  Jesws,  mean, 
deed,  succeed,  recede,  precede,  proceed  (AW),  concede,  exceed; 
lar^re,  church  ;  guard,  regard ;  poi?it,  appoi?it. 

XXX.  TERMINATIONS  FUL,  ABLE.    Final  1  may  be  omitted 
in  these  terminations ;  as  in,  able,  enable,  unable,  disable,  table, 
stable,  noble ;  affable,  capable,  conceivable,  corruptible,  forcible, 
moveable,  peaceable,  possible,  practicable,  probable,  syllable, 
tolerable,  visible;  Beautiful,  gleeful,  joyful,  merciful,  sinful. 

Unless  the  character  b  or  f  joins  easily  and  clearly,  the  dot 
should  be  used,  especially  if  the  mode  of  hiatus  would  be  re- 
quired in  any  case;  as  in,  accounta&Ze,  actionabZe,  admirafcZe, 
agreea&Ze,  censurable,  claimaMe,  combusti&Ze,  comforta&Ze, 
habitable,  honoura&Ze,  lauda&Ze,  legible,  memorable,  miserable, 
modifiabZe,  observaWe,  obtainable,  paya&Ze,  pitia&Ze,  profita&Ze, 
punishafiZe,  questionable,  sociable,  tamea&Ze,  teachable,  un- 
speakable, -variable  (mode  3),  valua&Ze  (mode  1);  aw/uZ,  change- 
ful,  delightful,  handful,  hopeful,  mindful,  peaceful,  powerful, 
spiteful,  successful,  thankful,  thoughtful,  trustful. 

XXXI.  SMALL  CIRCLE,  SUBSTANTIVAL  TERMINATIONS.    This 
should  be  restricted  to  compound  terminations  ending  in  -ness, 
which  are  common   in   Old   English;   such  as,   variableness, 
(mode  3),  reasonabZeness,  unanswerabZeness,  nobleness,  forgive- 
ness, expressiveness,  thank/wZness,  skil/wZness,  vfilfulness,  fanci- 
fulness,  bashfulness,  hopefulness,  sinfulness,  fretfulness,  artfiil- 
ness,  joyfulness,  thought/uiness,  manfulness,  carefulness,  righte- 
ousness  (3),  consciows/iess,  bounteoiisness  (3),  riotowsriess,  virtu- 
ousness  (1),  foolishness,  boyishness,  boorishness. 

In  abbreviating  substantives  ending  in  -ty  such  as  peculi- 
arity, probability,  legibility,  the  -ty  is  written  over. 

The  compound  U  st  may  be  used  in  writing  the  unaccented 
termination  -si ty ;  as  in,  adverstty,  atrocity,  audacity,  capacity, 
curiosity,  electricity,  monstrosity,  necessity,  velocity. 

XXXII.  TERMINATION  -NCE  (§  100). 

Dijference,  advance,  vengeance,  affiance,  clearance,  appear- 
ance, utterance,  perseverance,  endurance,  defence,  acceptance, 
acquaintance,  contrivance,  observance,  allowance,  licence, 
science,  conscience,  evidence,  pronounce,  expense.  Similarly, 
di/ferent  (t),  evident,  ancient,  sufficient,  advanced  (st),  acquain- 
tances (ses),  infancy  (sy),  sufficiency,  buoyancy,  decency,  fluency. 


124  Phrases. 

XXXIII.  A  AND  The   PHRASES.     The  articles  a  and  the 
should  generally  be  joined  after  prepositions,  conjunctions  and 
auxiliaries ; 

The  is  joined  as  an  upward  tick  after: — above,  across, 
all,  among,  and,  are,  as,  be,  been,  before,  between,  by,  can, 
does,  during,  even,  for,  has,  have,  if,  in,  is  (sy),  on,  o'er  (ooy), 
shall,  since,  than,  till,  up,  upon,  was  (ASY),  when,  within. 

The  is  joined  as  a  downward  tick  after  the  words : — about, 
after,  against,  at,  behind,  beneath,  beyond,  but,  called,  could, 
except,  from,  had,  hath,  how,  into,  not,  of,  out  (of),  round, 
should,  so,  that,  think,  though,  thought,  through,  throughout, 
to,  toward,  under,  unto,  what,  with,  without,  would. 

A  may  be  joined  after  any  of  the  above  words,  except  o'er, 
after,  under,  which  end  in  o. 

XXXIV.  AUXILIARY  PHRASES.     The  words   have  and   be 
should  be  joined  after  can,  could,  may,  might,  must,  ought-to, 
sJia(H),  sltould,  will,  would.     The  words  had,  been  and  become, 
should  be  joined  after  has,  have,  hath,  had.     The  words  do  and 
think  should  be  joined  after  shall,  should,  will,  ought-to. 

In  all  cases  words  involving  similar  joinings  may  be  attached 
in  phrases  of  this  kind ;  thus,  believe,  become,  be  able  to, 
present  the  same  joining  as  be  ;  take  joins  like  think  and  do. 

The  following  words  join  well  after  be; — this  (that  etc.), 
thought,  done,  proud,  pleased,  proposed,  probafc/e,  felt,  feared, 
foreseen,  found,  afraid,  vain,  called,  considered ;  words  begin- 
ning with  p,  b,  f  or  v,  also  join  well  after  have. 

XXXV.  NEGATIVE  PHRASES.    The  word  not  may  be  joined 
after  be,  can,  do,  have,  m(ay),  should,  shall,  will.    The  phrases, 
does  not,  has  not,  mus(t)  not,  was  not,  are  written  on  the  analogy 
of  it  is  not.    The  negative  may  be  expressed  by  a  cross-stroke 
after  will,  shall,  had,  should,  would,  could,  might,  ought  to. 

INTERSECTION.  Before  be,  been,  have,  do,  mean,  say,  think, 
and  similar  words,  the  negative  is  generally  expressed  by  inter- 
section, especially  after  the  auxiliaries,  can,  could,  may,  might, 
will,  would,  sliall,  should,  ought,  must,  had,  have,  do.  In  phrases, 
such  as  should  not  be,  ought  not  to  be,  where  intersection  is 
awkward,  the  second  word  is  written  close  below  the  first ;  the 
negative  itself  should  be  written  if  great  precision  is  required. 


CAMBRIDGE :  PRINTED  BY  C.  J.  CLAY,  M.A.  &  SONS,  AT  THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000099613     2 


BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR 


Price  Sixpence. 


PHONETIC   SPELLING 


ADAPTED   TO   ENGLISH. 


ILonfcon:  c.  J.  CLAY  AND  SONS, 

CAMBKIDGE   UNIVERSITY  PEESS   WAREHOUSE, 
AVE     MARIA    LANE.